JP7256403B2 - ball game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pinball game machine having a game area from which game balls are shot.

Conventionally, among various pinball game machines, a game machine called a so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display"). This game machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot in which more prize balls than in a normal game can be obtained when a combination of symbols becomes a specific mode when the variation of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped. known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only are multiple symbols variably displayed, but the variable display time is usually set in a state called a so-called reach screen, in which if one more symbol is aligned, a big hit will occur. The performance is intended to increase the player's sense of expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectations are heightened by effects that use characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display, and advance notice effects that suggest the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714 JP 2020-000422 A

In recent years, there is known a game machine that variably displays large and small performance symbols, and that allows the small performance symbols to remain visible even if the large performance symbols become difficult to see due to the fixed gimmick ( For example, see Patent Document 2). However, depending on how the game effect is designed, there is a risk that the design will reduce the visibility of the effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that facilitates ensuring visibility of effects.

In order to solve the above problems, a pinball game machine according to one aspect of the present invention includes a first start port through which game balls can be entered, a second start port through which game balls can be entered, and a first start port through which game balls can be entered. A first success/failure determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, with the entry of the ball into the starting port as a trigger; Triggered by the entry of a ball, second right/wrong determination means for executing right/wrong determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than normal game, and result of right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means. A first symbol display device in which a first special symbol is variably displayed to indicate a second symbol display device in which a second special symbol is variably displayed to indicate the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means; When the result of the success determination by the first success determination means or the result of the success determination by the second success determination means is a big hit, the special game control means for executing the special game and the first success determination corresponding to the first special symbol A performance content including a first decorative design that dramatically shows the result of the success/failure determination by the means and a second decorative design that represents the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means corresponding to the second special design is displayed. a performance display device to be displayed, a performance determination means for determining the performance contents, and a decoration corresponding to either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state while controlling the execution of the performance. a performance control means for variably displaying a pattern as a relatively large main decorative pattern on a performance display device and variably displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the performance display device; In front of the device, it is possible to perform an effect operation with movement in a predetermined area starting from an initial state at a predetermined initial position, and non-displayed on the effect display device in the operation accompanying the variable display effect of the main decorative pattern and a movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the main decorative pattern. The plurality of types of effects that can be executed by the effect control means include effects in which a movable accessory is operated in accordance with the display of the effect images, and the effect images are continuously displayed over a plurality of variable effect displays, The display of the performance image includes a continuous role performance in which a predetermined visual effect can be added to the performance image in conjunction with the movement of the movable role, and the performance control means controls the number of times of variable performance display in the continuous role performance. The performance control means can regulate the operation on a predetermined trajectory in a situation where the movable role object can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern in the continuous role object production. On the other hand, at least one of adding a visual effect and displaying a substitute image, which is an image having an appearance that can visually substitute for the movable character, is executed.

Another aspect of the present invention is also a pinball game machine. This pinball game machine has a first starting port that allows game balls to enter, a second starting port that allows game balls to enter, and a ball entering the first starting port. A first right/fail determination means for executing a right/fail determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game which is in a state advantageous to the player, and a ball entering the second start port as a trigger, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. 2nd right/wrong determination means for executing right/wrong determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game which is in a state, and a first special symbol for showing the result of right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means are variably displayed. A first pattern display device, a second pattern display device in which a second special pattern for showing the result of the right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means is variably displayed, and the result of the right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means or the second When the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a big hit, a special game control means for executing a special game, and a first stage which shows the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means corresponding to the first special symbol in a dramatic manner. A performance display device for displaying a performance content including a second decorative pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern and the second special pattern and showing the result of the success/failure determination by a second success/failure determination means in a dramatic manner, and a performance for determining the performance content. A performance display device for controlling the execution of a performance by a determining means and setting a decorative pattern corresponding to either one of a first special pattern and a second special pattern as a relatively large main decorative pattern in accordance with a game state. a performance control means for variably displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the performance display device; It is possible to perform an effect operation with movement in a predetermined area after starting, and on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device in the action accompanying the variable display effect of the main decorative pattern. and a movable accessory that operates. The plurality of types of effects that can be executed by the effect control means include effects in which a movable accessory is operated in accordance with the display of the effect images, and the effect images are continuously displayed over a plurality of variable effect displays, The display of the performance image includes a continuous role performance that can add a predetermined visual effect to the performance image in conjunction with the motion of the movable role, and the performance control means controls the motion of the movable role in the continuous role performance. When it is determined that the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern can be reduced by the determination, the movement of the movable role and the addition of visual effects that were scheduled to be executed once or more after the determination are restricted. .

In addition, any combination of the above constituent elements, and those in which the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are replaced with each other between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the pinball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that can easily ensure the visibility of the presentation.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a functional block of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main substrate; FIG. It is a figure which shows typically a right/wrong determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing range setting of winning/failing lottery values for each set value; It is a figure which shows a pattern determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination; It is a figure which shows typically the preliminary right/wrong determination table corresponding to game setting. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows typically the outline of a mobile cooperation system. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and sub-boards; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the main board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. 15; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the sub-board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing in detail the main process of S518 in FIG. 20; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board; It is a flow chart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special design variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a decorative design variation display. It is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small-hit game. It is a diagram showing a basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine of the embodiment. It is a functional block diagram showing in detail the specific game control means in FIG. It is a figure which shows typically the design determination table referred to in the case of a big hit. It is a game state transition diagram schematically showing the relationship between each game state and transition opportunities. It is a figure which shows typically the right/wrong determination table in a present Example. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the state of symbol variation and the end condition of the easy-to-enter state. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the change of a game state, and the timing of a left-handed warning. It is a flowchart showing the relationship between the type of special game, the effect of the transition destination, and the game state. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of a decorative design, an alternative design, and a simple design. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a logo movable accessory and a light-guide plate. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the performance timing in the special game of the 2R probability variable big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation process of a 1st special fluctuation|variation production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation process of a 2nd special fluctuation production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram of a table schematically illustrating the correspondence relationship between types of basic variation patterns and types of additional variation pattern tables; FIG. 10 is a diagram of a table schematically illustrating the correspondence relationship between types of variation addition patterns and types of variation addition pattern tables; It is a time chart comparing the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the time of the small hit game and the time of the deviation fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state and an production stage. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen which displays the acquisition prize ball number in a small-hit rush. It is a figure which illustrates the screen structure of the production|presentation display apparatus in 13th Example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing a movable accessory in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a movable accessory moves between an initial state and a state in which the production action is completed. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the performance operation start timing of the movable role and the stop period of the second special symbol. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the return operation timing of the movable role in the low probability low base state and the stop period of the second special symbol. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the return operation timing of the movable role in the high probability high base state and the stop period of the second special symbol. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation period of the movable accessory and the symbol variation period during which special effects occur. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition from the production|presentation in execution to a special production|presentation. 5 is a time chart illustrating the relationship between the action of the movable accessory and the control of the LEDs; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a movable role product and a substitute role product image; 5 is a time chart exemplifying the relationship between a variable performance in a continuous role performance, the action of a movable role, an alternative role product image, and a visual effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing another example of a substitute role product image; 5 is a time chart exemplifying the relationship between the variable performance, the movement of the movable role, the following visual effect, and the background visual effect in the continuous role performance. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the effective period of the operation-type accessory-linked production, the production operation start timing, and the return operation start. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the arrangement|positioning of LED installed behind a transparent liquid crystal display, and the position of a non-main decorative pattern.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Moreover, in order to make these game characteristics compatible, it is equipped with a plurality of starting prize winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps. It is designed so that the number of jackpot balls released in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with variable probability, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that make up the special game when the second game hits (the opening time of the big winning port is A long long opening unit game and a short opening unit game having a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is longer than the first game. ), the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game. On top of that, at first, the first game is aimed at the first hit, and after the big hit in the first game is given to shorten the working time, the second game is repeatedly aimed at to obtain a lot of balls. come true.

FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, A decorative lamp 111 is included. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 to a position to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body aligned with the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door 104 . The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray 106, and the like. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds are output according to the game state and the performance by means of controlling the performance. Most of the resin member forming the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the translucent interior. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by a means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a game area 81 partitioned by rails 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central part of the game area 81 and its upper and right parts. 60 protection, decoration and other functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game ball that has flowed in rolls. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. Above the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 is provided which is driven along with the content of the performance to perform a performance action. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path for game balls are installed. In this specification, "entering the ball", "winning", and "falling" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entrance may be configured as a "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass. ', 'winning', 'falling in' and 'passing' may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first game, and the second starting port 12 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible to aim for entry into one of the game balls according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided substantially at the lower center of the game area 81 , and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11 . Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first start hole 11 and the second start hole 12, while right-handed. That is, if the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting hole 12, but it is impossible to enter the first starting hole 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is usually covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of the game ball is hindered, unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12 is impossible or difficult to enter. The winning lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is executed each time a ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. be.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to target one of them depending on the launch strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be arranged separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one side is difficult to enter the other side. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when the ball is hit left-handed, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64 . The second starting hole 12 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when hitting the ball to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly so as to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64 .

The first starting port 11 is provided with a first starting winning detection device 16 . The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 11, and generates first start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting prize detection device 17, a normal electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 90. Prepare. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 12, and generates second start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry.

The first operation opening 31 is provided at a left side position of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36 . The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation opening 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when it passes. The second operation opening 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37 . The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operation opening 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery for determining whether or not to spread the normal electric accessory 90 . When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is the symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display portion 45. - 特許庁Therefore, the open lottery is also called "normal symbol lottery". After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display of normal symbols stops. When the normal symbol stops at a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12 increases. As a modified example, the number of operating ports may be set to one, and the configuration may be such that one is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 .

The three general winning openings 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the game ball at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20 . The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 20, and generates big winning hole winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34 . In addition, as a modified example, one more large winning opening may be provided in the central lower portion of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port from which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and includes an out detection device 39 . The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out port 34 is provided at the central lowermost end of the game area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A pattern display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80 . The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display portion 41, a second special symbol display portion 42, a first special symbol reservation display portion 71, a second special symbol reservation display portion 72, a normal symbol display portion 45, and a normal symbol display portion. Display units such as a holding display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, an abnormality notification unit 77, and the like are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display portion 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display portion 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol Variations of 51 and second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second success or failure lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are, for example, an 8-segment LED consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily form letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42, or predetermined display (eg "-") and non-display (eg all lights off) are switched. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 use an LED dot array that is not an 8-segment LED, and a plurality of kinds of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are combined with the lighting pattern and the lighting color. A special pattern 52 may be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have a role of production, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol on the lower left side of the game area 81 are displayed. It is displayed in an inconspicuous size on the display part 42.例文帳に追加However, when adopting a method of expressing without using a decorative pattern by giving the special pattern itself a dramatic role, the special pattern is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to allow

Above the first special symbol display part 41, a first special symbol reservation display part 71 is provided as a suspension lamp for special symbol variation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display part 42, a second special symbol display part 71 is provided. A second special symbol reservation display portion 72 is provided as a special symbol variation reservation lamp corresponding to the game of . The first special figure reservation display unit 71 consists of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game depending on the number of lights or blinking numbers (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) (also simply referred to as "holding number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the first start port 11 during the variation of the first special symbol 51 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display unit 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the second start port 12 during the variation of the second special symbol 52 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The pending number of win/fail lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display portion 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120 . For the sake of convenience, the normal symbol display portion 45 is composed of two lamps, and the normal symbol display state is represented by a lighting combination thereof. First, by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, the variation of the normal pattern is expressed, and finally, the combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp is the stop pattern of the normal pattern. is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop pattern of losing, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first winning mode, and the first A second winning mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

In addition, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a normal pattern suspension display portion 75 is provided as a suspension lamp for normal symbol variation. The normal pattern reservation display unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of normal pattern fluctuations reserved by the number of lights or the number of flashes. The number of pending normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during normal symbol fluctuations, and the number of normal symbol lotteries in which normal symbol fluctuations have not yet been executed. indicates

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77 . The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting a lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and extinguishing when the normal state. to display the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies an abnormality of a part of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality with a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of abnormality. It should be noted that these display units may be configured individually without being collectively arranged in the pattern display unit 120, or they may be divided into a plurality of display devices grouped as appropriate. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be configured so as to be limited to a predetermined period of time, for example, a certain period of time after the power is restored.

Approximately in the center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative pattern 61 interlocking with the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 is displayed. Display the variation of the effect image including. Such display is hereinafter referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative pattern 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 . The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually directing the determination result display of the lottery indicated by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 . The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of patterns imitating a slot machine game, for example, are varied in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols composed of numerals "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and varied, and finally the combinations of the three symbols that are stopped and displayed indicate hits or misses. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns. It may be configured in such a manner that a different pattern is added to each and integrated. The pattern is a pattern in which a motif related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be a pattern in which a person or an animal character is drawn, for example. The decorative pattern 61 is switched between a case where the pattern integrally included in the pattern is variably displayed and a case where the pattern is separated and only the numbers, letters and symbols are variably displayed according to the development of the performance. The configuration may be such that In the background of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a performance effect related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern variation.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot-matrix display device. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the game ball with maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed hit", the right side passage is almost certain. A game ball can be passed through, and it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub-liquid crystal, may be combined. (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). If installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured by mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the effect. A performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102 . The production button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the production button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the production button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a performance lever 112 in a state of protruding outside, and the player can grip the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105 .

The game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the shooting handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided by the rail 82 one by one and shot to the game area 81 with the intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotating position of the shooting handle 107, the shooting of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball shot to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center ornament 64, etc., and falls in a direction according to how it hits. When the game ball falls into each of the winning openings of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening enter the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. It is dispensed onto the ball tray 106 . A game ball falling into each winning hole such as a general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball falling into an out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The ejection of safe balls may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the specification may be such that the safe balls are guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all of the ejections are detected by the out detection device 39. may be Alternatively, guidance of safe balls and detection of safe balls by the out detection device 39 may not be performed, and the number of discharged balls may be determined by adding the number of detected safe balls to the number of detected out balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display part 45, and is stop-displayed after the lapse of the variability display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbols are stop-displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped-displayed symbols and the game state when they are stopped. . That is, when the game state when the symbols are stopped is the normal game state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a short period of 0.1 seconds. Further, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state), the normal symbols are displayed in the second winning mode during the normal time and the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state). When the stop display is performed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 . Here, the winning probability of normal symbols and the execution probability of long opening are set differently depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal pattern wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning pattern of the first winning mode is selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (the probability of selecting the winning pattern of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, easy ball entry state), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability between the first win mode and the second win mode is the same as in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed even if the lottery is won in any mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal pattern (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (0 when the opening time is displayed stopped in the first winning mode) 0.1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced. In addition, the function (long opening) of extending the operation period of the normal electric accessory 90 may be called "open extension".

In addition, as described above, the probability of long opening in the normal state is higher than the probability of short opening, so that the long opening is executed at a certain rate even in the normal state when winning the normal pattern. . As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening. good. Further, in the ball-entering easy state, it is possible to increase the ease of ball-entering the second starting port 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the variation time of normal symbols. In that case, the normal pattern variation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the normal electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded, it may be notified in advance to that effect, or may be notified before the start of the normal pattern variation by reading in advance the suspension of the normal symbol variation, or the normal symbol variation may be notified. Notification may be made during the change.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is extended to about 6 seconds by repeating the 2-second opening, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It is good also as an aspect. Alternatively, a plurality of combinations of the open time and the number of times of opening may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of three 2-second openings, the total opening time is the same as in the case of one 6-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modification in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former is the one who enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening matches the hitting direction with the second starting port 12 from that point. The chances are long. In addition, it is possible to configure such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism differs according to the winning types. For example, when the normal pattern is the first hit, the normal state is 0.1 seconds open once, and the easy ball entry state is 1 second open three times, and when the second hit is the normal state. In this case, the ball may be opened once for 6 seconds, and in the easy-to-ball state, the open for 2 seconds may be opened twice.

On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display section 41, the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60. , and the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which the variation mode from the start to stop of variation is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to a variability performance pattern in which a variability mode from the start to stop of the variability is determined. Plural kinds of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared respectively, and each of them has various lengths of variation time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative design 61 is variably displayed according to the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. In the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation display time is set for each pattern as a condition for ending the pattern fluctuation, and when the fluctuation display time elapses, the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 change. be stopped. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern will be exemplified, and the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. In addition, details such as a method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, first, the symbols in all three rows are changed like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine at the start of the variation, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped row by row, thereby finally stopping. Display the symbol combination as. Incidentally, as an operation when the variation of the decorative symbols 190 is stopped, it is possible to control not to stop one row at a time but to stop a plurality of rows at the same time so as to attract the attention of the performance display other than the decorative symbols during the variable display, or in a shorter variation time. You may enable it to display a design variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of variation of a part of the rows according to the subsequent development of the variation (type of production pattern, etc.), so as to produce a sense of expectation. can be

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable performance pattern includes a normal out of reach performance pattern, a reach out performance pattern, and a reach big hit performance pattern. The normal outlier effect pattern is a effect pattern when displaying a normal outlier pattern combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when a combination of out-of-reach symbols is displayed through a ready-to-win state in which a big win is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The ready-to-win big-hit production pattern is a production pattern when a big-hit symbol combination is displayed through the ready-to-win state. In particular, the reach state pattern includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. A reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ”. The usual out-of-ordinary performance pattern, the out-of-reach performance pattern, and the ready-to-win big hit performance pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second pattern variation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the big hit will change and the number of unit games of the special game will increase. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first variation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance presentation may be used to indicate that there is a chance for a relatively advantageous big win to occur. In addition, although the pattern for time saving is used in a time saving state in an Example, since it accompanies time saving in a probability variable state, the time saving pattern is used also in a probability variable state. However, in the modified example, it may be a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation that is different from that for time saving in the probability variation state. Alternatively, it may be a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation, or a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation in a probability variation state without using a pattern for time saving.

When the number of winning lotteries held reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of losing is shortened (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened variation") in order to improve the game efficiency. Similarly, when the number of pending lotteries is 4, the pattern variation time in the case of losing is further shortened than the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "super shortened variation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping become a stop mode indicating a big win after the above-described symbol fluctuation, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is started. The mode of stopping the decorative symbols 61 indicating a big hit is, for example, a mode of combination in which the types of three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a big difference in the profit from winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called start demo time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big winning hole 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls fall, it is temporarily closed. The operation from opening to closing of such a large prize winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be cases where multiple short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the big winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 10 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying an effect screen called end demo time. In normal special games, 9 or more balls can be sufficiently expected to be entered per unit game, and sufficient prize balls (also referred to as ``discharged balls'') can be obtained through 10 unit games, resulting in a large profit. is obtained. A special game in which the unit game is repeated 10 times is arbitrarily called a "10R big hit", and a special game in which the unit game is repeated 4 times is arbitrarily called a "4R big hit". In addition, although the unit game is repeated 10 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a few times by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantial nR jackpot") similar to the one.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost short (eg, 0.1 seconds), and the big winning opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice and the shortened special game is ended. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the big winning hole 20 is repeated only twice for a very short period of time, almost no ball can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls that come out is substantially zero or few (for example, a few It is a special game equal to the number of payouts corresponding to 1 to 2 balls in one round, such as about 10 balls to about 10 balls. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also called a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, a shortened special game can be realized by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

Further, through the above-described pattern variation, when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 and the decorative pattern 61 at the time of stop are in a predetermined small winning mode, a small winning game composed of one unit game , and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small winning game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to that of the 2R big winning.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop pattern at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), a probability variation, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the special game is finished. During the probability variation, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the determination result of the win/fail lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with a probability change may not be clearly indicated on the outside, and may be in a latent probability change state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the probability is variable or non-variable even during the variable probability. It should be noted that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect display device 60 may indicate whether it is a probability variation or a non-probability variation.

An easy ball entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started in the normal game after the special game ends. In the ball-entering easy state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90. - 特許庁Since the number of hits of normal symbols per fixed period of time can be increased and the ease with which a ball enters the second starting port 12 also increases, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will also increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls in possession or gradually increasing the number of balls in possession.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, so-called time saving is further executed in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, but the fluctuation number is reached. If a big hit occurs before, the time saving will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is shortened in the reduction of working hours, compared with the case of the normal state in which the pattern is changed with the normal fluctuation time, it is possible to wait until the big hit occurs. time can be shortened, and the easiness of obtaining a big win can be relatively increased. In a modified example, it may be a specification that does not implement the time saving of the special symbol in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine 100 . The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and processes overall game operations such as a lottery when winning the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 in particular. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls display contents in the effect display device 60 , and particularly changes the effect display contents according to the determination result by the main board 200 . The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 according to the winning to each prize winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154 . The shooting device 156 shoots the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 to the game area 81 one by one. A firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the launcher 156 . The power board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . A performance display section 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200 . The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number indicating the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be for the player. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set value. It includes a setting display section 173 that lights up and a setting memory that stores set values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey switch for shifting to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") and a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, and the setting key is turned to turn it on. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the number “1” indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172 . The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . . . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, and the setting change is confirmed. , it becomes a playable state. On the other hand, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display portion 173 . In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state to turn it off, the game becomes ready for play. When the setting key is turned off to enable a game, the setting display section 173 is turned off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key OFF state), the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key ON state), the RAM is cleared and the setting change state is entered. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is off, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159 . In this case, the combined display section may function as the performance display section 159 in the playable state, and may function as the setting display section 173 in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the change of game settings may be disabled.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described. For the part already described as , the term may be used as it is for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 includes a power board 158 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. , a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of game balls to the game area, and controls the performance operations and processes. It is configured in a form in which the function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-controller.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, a group of general winning ports (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the output port 34, the pattern display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200 , the firing control board 157 and the payout device 154 . The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the control state of the prize ball payout and the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200, and indirectly controls the launch control board 157. , and the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154 is controlled. Dispensing device 154 includes dispensing motor 166 and ball counting sensor 167 . The firing control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and controls the ball feeding device 164 and the ball feeding device 164 based on a firing permission signal or the like transmitted from the payout control board 155. A device 156 is controlled to shoot a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes the effect display device 60, the movable accessories 66 (the drive motor 67, the position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, the cross key 110), the decorative lamp 111 and the electrical and transmit and receive various control signals to and from each other.

The main board 200 and the sub-board 300 are configured so that data transmission/reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300 . Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main substrate 200 to the sub substrate 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub substrate 300 to the configuration included in the main substrate 200. I can't even ask. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 , and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157 , data transmission/reception is performed bidirectionally. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data can be sent and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. A configuration for data transmission/reception may be employed.

Each functional block included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300, which will be described below, is merely an example. may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Also, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided and provided on a plurality of substrates so that one functional block is configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main substrate 200. As shown in FIG. The main board 200 includes an entry determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a normal figure lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small winning game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening and closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, It comprises main error detection means 284 , setting change means 286 , setting confirmation means 287 and command communication means 205 .

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The entering ball determining means 201 determines entering of a game ball into each winning hole. The ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11 when receiving the first start winning information, and determines that the game ball has won the second starting opening 12 when receiving the second start winning information. to decide. A ball entry judging means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the big winning slot 20 when receiving the big winning slot winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning slot 33 when receiving the general winning slot information. The entering ball determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 when passing information is received. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 when receiving the discharge information. The entered ball determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display section 159 . The ball-entering determination means 201 calculates the "number of balls paid out"/"number of out-balls"×100 when the probability of winning a big hit is normal probability and normal ball-entering state (so-called low probability and low ball-entering state). is displayed on the performance display unit 159 . Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random Number Generation Means 202>
The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various decisions in the first lottery means 211 , the second lottery means 212 and the normal pattern lottery means 213 . Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number (also referred to as a "lottery value") used in the lottery by the first lottery determination means 221 and the second lottery determination means 222. A range of random numbers is generated by predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 selects from "0" to "255" as a random number (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in design determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. A random number in the range of up to is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 uses "0" to "255 ” is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 generates a random number in the range from "0" to "99" as a random number to be used in the success/failure lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 by means of a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. In addition, "random number" here refers to physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, true random numbers in a mathematical sense, and pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using random number generation algorithms. It's okay. Alternatively, random numbers generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used. The random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means. .

<Universal drawing lottery means 213>
The normal pattern lottery means 213 generates a random number used for the lottery of the normal pattern and the random number used for determining the stop pattern of the normal pattern when the game ball passes through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. 202 to execute a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol success/failure determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. holding a table and The correspondence relationship between the lottery value for win/fail lottery and the win is defined in the normal symbol determination table, and the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol determination table. Based on the winning probability and the selection probability of the symbol, the success or failure of the normal symbol and the stop symbol are determined. The normal pattern lottery means 213 determines the stop pattern of the normal pattern with reference to the normal pattern determination table when the lottery value for the success/failure lottery of the normal pattern corresponds to the hit, and the lottery value for the success/failure lottery of the normal pattern is determined. If it falls under the deviation, always determine the mode of the 1 deviation symbol. If the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is a win, and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, determines the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The opening time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily reserved by the reservation control means 240 which will be described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when it does not exceed the predetermined upper limit number reserved by the reservation control means 240 .

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/fail determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination as a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game. A means 231 is included, and a first win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second propriety determination means 222, a second pattern determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second winning lottery is executed as a winning lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212 , the second special symbol 52 is displayed in the second special symbol display section 42 by the main display control means 250 . Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG.

<First Lottery Value Obtaining Means 216 and Second Lottery Value Obtaining Means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . Specifically, the first success/failure lottery value for success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern A first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquiring means 217 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generating means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12 . Specifically, the second success or failure lottery value for success or failure determination by the second success or failure determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, the second variation pattern A second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means.

The first success/failure determination means 221 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the first success/failure lottery value. The second success/failure determination means 222 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the second success/failure lottery value. In the success/failure determination, more specifically, "big hit" indicating transition to a special game, "small hit" indicating transition to a small hit game, " It is determined whether it corresponds to "out of". The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 hold a right/wrong judgment table referred to in the right/wrong judgment. In addition, in order to distinguish the success/failure determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation from the prior success/failure determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "the success/failure determination as the main determination". In this specification, when the term "table" or "selection criteria" is used, the relationship between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined in the table structure. It not only refers to data, but also broadly includes implementation by a program structure that derives a second parameter from a first parameter as such a correspondence relationship. The concept including them is substantially synonymous with the "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

The first right/wrong determination means 221 and the second right/wrong determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective right/wrong determinations as right/wrong determination tables referred to in the right/wrong determination. Specifically, a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means 221 (also referred to as a "first right/wrong determination table") and a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means 222 ("second (also referred to as "validity judgment table") is held, and a table to be referred to is selected according to the validity judgment to be executed. Judgment results of big hits, small wins, and misses are associated with winning/failing lottery values in a plurality of winning/failing determination tables, and winning/failing probabilities are determined according to the range setting of the associated big wins. In addition, a plurality of types of win/fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. is prepared. In addition, when the probability of a big hit, a small win, and a loss is the same among a plurality of game settings, a winning/failure determination table that is common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a propriety determination table. This figure shows a win-or-fail determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a win-fail determination table corresponding to setting 6. FIG. In the hit/fail determination table of this figure, the determination results of big wins, small wins, and misses are associated with the win/fail lottery values. is determined. The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 refer to the right/wrong judgment table of this figure in the right/wrong judgment as the main judgment. In both of the first success/failure lottery by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure lottery by the second success/failure determination means 222, a big win is normally made only when the success/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0-299. When the odds are variable, the range of big wins is expanded, and the big wins occur not only when the win/fail lottery value falls within the range of 0-299, but also when it falls within the range of 300-2999. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state. In this figure, a single hit/fail determination table shows the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability, but the hit/fail determination table may be prepared separately for normal time and for variable probability. It may be separately prepared for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning/failure lottery value does not fall within the big winning range, it will be a small winning if it falls within a predetermined range. In the example of this figure, if the winning lottery value acquired by the first winning judgment means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, it becomes a small hit, and the winning lottery value acquired by the second winning judgment means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first win/fail lottery has a wider range of small wins than the second win/fail lottery, and the small wins are more likely to occur. In this way, when it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all "missing", but in the example of this figure, the winning or not lottery value range when it does not correspond to the small hit among the cases where it does not correspond to the big hit is especially expressed as "outside". In other words, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "whether it is a big hit or not", "minor win" may be included in the broad sense of "loss" in the sense of "not a big hit". Further, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "minor win" and "big win" may be included in the broad definition of "hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the determination table for whether or not the big hit is made and the determination table for whether or not the small win is made are realized in the form of a single winning or not judgment table. good. Further, the "small win" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may be provided in neither game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/fail determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning lottery value for each set value. FIG. 1(a) shows the correspondence relationship between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determination means 221 and the win/fail determination result. FIG. 2(b) shows the correspondence relationship between the second win/fail lottery value acquired by the second win/fail determination means 222 and the win/fail determination result. The range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit at normal time and probability change is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", and the setting value is " 0 to 296 if the set value is "3", 0 to 297 if the set value is "4", 0 to 298 if the set value is "5", and 0 to 299 if the set value is "6". Therefore, the larger the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that result in a big win in the normal time, and the probability of winning a big win in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit only at the time of probability change (that is, the loss in normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959 if the setting value is "3", 297 to 2969 if the setting value is "4", 298 to 2979 if the setting value is "4", 299 to 2989 if the setting value is "5", and if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, the greater the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that will result in a big win at the time of variable probability, and the higher the probability of winning a big win at the time of variable probability. The range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the ratio between the normal big win probability of winning a big win in a normal time and the big winning probability of winning a big win in a variable probability is constant irrespective of the set value. In this figure, the range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the variable probability jackpot probability is 10 times the normal jackpot probability, and is common to all set values "1" to "6". . In addition, the range of win/fail lottery values is determined so that the probability of winning a small win is constant regardless of the set value. In all set values "1" to "6", if the range of the first winning lottery value falls within 56500 to 65535, it will be a small hit, and if the range of the second winning lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535, it will be a small hit. It hits. The range of win/fail lottery values outside the range of a big win or a small win is "off". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence relationship between the win/fail lottery value and the win/fail determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same for different set values.

<First Symbol Determination Means 226 and Second Symbol Determination Means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stop symbol at the start of symbol fluctuation based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning/losing determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the results of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, A plurality of symbol determination tables are held according to the determination result. A first win/fail determination means 221 holds a first pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to when winning big, a first symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a first symbol determination table for loss to be referred to when losing. A second win/fail determination means 222 holds a second pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to for big wins, a second symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a second symbol determination table for misses to be referred to for misses. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the success/failure determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination to be executed when the symbol variation is started from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately called "symbol determination as the final determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a miss, and FIG. 7(c) is a This is a table to be referred to when the result of winning/failure determination is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this figure in the symbol determination as the final determination. Each symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the types of special symbols and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of big wins, small wins, and misses, respectively. "10" corresponds to an out. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combining segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a big hit and probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144”. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "actual 4R hit") with probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first design lottery value, and in the case of the second design lottery value It is associated with "145 to 149". The type "2" indicates a 2R big hit with variable probability, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot. Type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot, and type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the contents of the jackpot and whether or not there is a change in probability thereafter) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is also possible to provide more types of special patterns, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of types of special patterns, it is possible to increase the number of types of patterns and increase the number of jackpots. You can set less types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into a larger number of types of jackpots corresponding to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one kind of jackpot is determined so as to correspond to each of the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the first lottery and the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of the probability change to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery values of the entire range when the winning/failing determination result is out. Therefore, it is decided that the same special symbol should always be stop-displayed in the case of being out. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of being out.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". The type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as a preliminary symbol determination table also in the preliminary symbol determination in order to save the storage area in the main board 200. FIG. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 indicate the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination, indicating that the value is the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of pending. In addition, as the preliminary symbol determination table, a table that is further subdivided to enable execution of complicated determination, or a simple one that summarizes the determination range of big hit symbols for executing a similar special game may be used. . In addition, when the pattern is uniformly determined at the time of loss as in the present embodiment, a specific pattern can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a pattern determination table for loss. may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 obtains from the random number generating means 202 the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination means 232 uses the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 as the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined. Based on this, it is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main substrate 200 include a variation pattern table to be referred to for determining the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and a change pattern table to the start port. Each holds or shares a pre-pattern determination table used to generate information for determination of execution of look-ahead processing at the time of ball entry. In the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is determined, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the type. That is, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is substantially determined for each pattern as a termination condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. is stopped from changing. Incidentally, the variation pattern determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative design to be described later, it may be defined as different types of variation patterns with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table of this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of this figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the success/failure determination result is out of the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "normal 1", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select the "normal 2”. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number "4" and "no reach out" are selected. As "no reach out", different variation patterns are selected according to the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0 to 2, 7 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 3, number of holds is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

In this figure, an example in which five types are mainly classified according to the variation time will be described. A plurality of variation performance patterns are prepared for each variation pattern on the sub-board 300, and there are dozens of variation performance patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "No Reach Out" also varies depending on the number of holds. When the number of reservations is 0, 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" narrows, and the lottery value of "no reach out" Wider range. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the probability that the variation pattern with a long variation time is selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence relationship between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

In the normal state, if the success/failure determination result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, it selects "Super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6". If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "normal 2”.

In the normal state, when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, it selects "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) is It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is the lottery or the second lottery, and the number of pending lotteries. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the preliminary pattern determination is exemplified so as to have a table for each success/failure determination result. In addition to deriving only information about the range in which it is positioned, the control means of the sub-board 300 may be controlled so as to determine what kind of variation is to be performed along with the result of the preliminary suitability determination.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as in FIG. "No reach out, shortened" is a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as the "no reach out" in FIG. 8(a). "Reach without reach shortening" also selects a different variation pattern depending on the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0, 1, 1 second variation pattern when the number of holds is 2 to 4 are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery, and the second lottery is given priority over the first lottery, the ball-entering state is easy due to the time saving. A situation in which the holding of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the loss fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table in which a long-time (for example, 10 seconds) fluctuation pattern that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations is referred to. You can do it.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4 , the reservation control means 240 includes a special figure reservation means 241 and a normal figure reservation means 242 . When the special figure holding means 241 newly acquires the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value, the symbol variation corresponding to the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value acquired before that. is displayed, the start of pattern variation corresponding to the newly obtained first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is suspended, and the win/fail lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding pattern. Here, for the first special symbols, the upper limit is four, and the first success or failure lottery value, the first pattern lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored. A second lottery value, a second pattern lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal pattern reservation means 242 stores the normal pattern lottery value acquired by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. The numbers of these reservations are represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure reservation display portion 71, the second special figure reservation display portion 72, and the normal figure reservation display portion 75, respectively. The number of reservations by the special figure reservation means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁

The lottery value of the second success/failure lottery retained in the special figure retention means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first success/failure lottery, and the pattern variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the big win lottery value is reserved as the first win/fail lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/fail lottery, the pattern variation corresponding to the big win lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if the big win is reserved in the first win/fail lottery, by continuing to beat until the big win is held in the second win/fail lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of continuous big wins can be obtained.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 , a second special figure control means 252 and a general figure control means 254 . The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the first winning lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let The first special figure control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win-or-fail lottery or the second win-or-fail lottery made before is completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let The second special figure control means 252 also makes the completion of the fluctuation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery performed before that a new symbol variation start condition.

The first special figure control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success/failure lottery when the success/failure lottery value of the second success/failure lottery is stored by the special figure retention means 241.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second success or failure lottery regardless of whether or not the success or failure lottery value of the first success or failure lottery is stored by the special figure reservation means 241.例文帳に追加Thus, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the pattern variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out and the symbol variation does not start until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes zero.

The 1st special figure control means 251 and the 2nd special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing to start and stop the variable display of the 1st special symbol 51 and the 2nd special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, a value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, stop pattern, and variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and a value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. The normal pattern control means 254 causes the normal pattern display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as the fluctuation display of the normal pattern.

<Special Figure Adjustment Means 276>
The special figure adjustment means 276 waits the start of the other variation display while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 is the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball entered the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always preferentially consumed and the second special pattern 52 is continuously varied and displayed.

In addition, the special figure adjustment means 276 in the modified example changes the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 It may be selectively variably displayed. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the display fluctuates in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the success or failure lottery value. Which special symbol should be varied is determined according to the order of game ball entry, that is, the retention order of the winning lottery value in the retention control means 240, so the player can easily grasp the variation order visually.

Even if the special figure adjustment means 276 in another modification displays the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 . For example, when both the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed alternately. Which special symbol should be varied is simply alternated regardless of the order of game ball entry, so the player can intuitively grasp the order of variation.

The special figure adjusting means 276 also waits for the start of the other variable display when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols is not started while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The prior determination means 235 includes a first lottery prior determination means 236 and a second lottery prior determination means 237 . First lottery pre-determination means 236 includes various random numbers acquired by first lottery value acquisition means 216 before execution of various determinations by first success/failure determination means 221, first symbol determination means 226, and first variation pattern determination means 231 Before the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251 using the information about the fluctuation is determined in advance. The second lottery pre-determination means 237, the second lottery value acquisition means 217 various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before executing various determinations by the second success/failure determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 Before the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252 using the information about the fluctuation is determined in advance.

The first lottery prior determination means 236 includes a first prior lottery value determination table, a first prior symbol lottery value determination table, and a first prior variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for prior determination of the first lottery means 211. hold the table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior variation pattern determination table. These determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information about the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub board 300 by command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination. The first lottery prior determination means 236 (preliminary success/failure determination for the first game) refers to the first prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the result of the prior suitability determination. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the prior winning judgment result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (preliminary determination regarding the first game) is performed by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating that it is the first lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, and the like.

The second lottery prior determination means 237 (preliminary success/failure determination for the second game) refers to the second prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. If the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary suitability determination result. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64000 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, referring to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . If the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the second preliminary variation pattern random value judgment table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern judgment result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (preliminary right or wrong determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. (Indicating that it is a second lottery), information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of 4, similarly to the number of reserved storages. It should be noted that the pre-determination result may be stored using the reservation storage area that the reservation control means 240 stores. The information may be erased based on transmission of the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas and erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as the determination table for preliminary determination, the determination table for main determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to preliminary determination, and the preliminary determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game may be performed. A part or all of them may share a common pre-determination table. In this way, by sharing this table with other determination tables, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the main board 200 . It should be noted that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the prior determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of acceptance or rejection, for example. In addition, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 without being judged by the advance judgment means 235, and the sub-board 300 may be configured to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The prior determination means 235 may refer to a prior success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the success/failure lottery value and the prior success/failure determination result differs according to the setting value set by the setting change device 170 . As with the win/loss determination table described above, a plurality of types of pre-win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the pre-win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set values of the game settings. In addition, a pre-win/fail lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be pre-determined by a combination of the set value of the game settings and the value of the pre-win/fail determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior success/failure determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 3(a) is a prior determination table referred to by the first lottery prior determination means 236, and FIG. 4(b) is a prior determination table referred to by the second lottery prior determination means 237. If the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 294", the result of the prior win/fail determination is "11", indicating that all the settings 1 to 6 will result in a big hit. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the result of prior win/loss determination is "12", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 2 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the result of prior win/loss determination is "13", which indicates that a big hit is achieved with the normal setting of 3 or more or with all the settings during the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "14", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 4 or more or in all the settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "298", the result of prior win/fail determination is "15", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "299", the prior win/loss determination result is "16", indicating that a big win is achieved with the normal setting of 6 or all the settings during the variable probability. Also, when the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2949", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "21", indicating that all the settings at the time of probability change will result in a big win. If the win/loss lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the result of prior win/loss determination is "22", indicating that a big hit is achieved at the setting of 2 or higher at the time of variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the prior win/loss judgment result is "23", which indicates that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 3 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the result of prior win/loss determination is "23", indicating that a big hit is achieved when the odds are set to 4 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the prior win/loss determination result is "25", indicating that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 5 or more. When the win/loss lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the prior win/loss determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability variation will result in a big hit. Furthermore, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the advance judgment result is " 30”, indicating that it will be a small hit in all settings. In addition, when the first winning lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and when the second winning lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the preliminary winning judgment result is " 40”, indicating that it is out in all settings. By using such a prior success/failure determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate prior success/failure determination result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game. A special game is executed by determining that a condition is established and opening the big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in indicating the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. A special game is executed by determining that a special game operating condition is satisfied and opening a big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big winning opening 20 is continued a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated ten times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose opening time is shorter than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 10R big win and 4R big win, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the big prize opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is consumed. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big prize opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
A small winning game control means 265 operates a small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning manner when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. A small winning game is executed by judging that the condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit, the small hit game control means 265 determines that when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode, the small win game control means 265 A small winning game is executed by determining that a winning game operation condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning opening 20 for only about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the big winning opening 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability variable state, the time saving state, and the ball easy state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state and an easy ball entry state after the end of the special game when the special pattern is a pattern of a specific jackpot accompanied by a transition to a variable probability. The variable probability state, the time saving state and the easy ball entry state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally shortened. do. However, in a normal state, reference is made to the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of retentions of the lottery value by the retention control means 240, and as the number of retentions by the retention control means 240 decreases, a variation pattern with a longer variation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of variable probability of normal symbols, short time of normal symbols, and extension of the opening of the second start port 12 is performed, so that the entry to the second start port 12 The ball frequency (ease of entering the ball) is improved. During the variable probability state, the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 is a big hit is maintained at a high value. Further, the specific game control means 270 puts the second starting port 12 in an open extension state when the specific jackpot is obtained, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. It shifts to a probability variable state higher than the normal probability state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20 . The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 when the normal pattern is stopped in a specific manner. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 with a short or long opening time according to the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second start port 12 with a long opening time in the easy-to-enter state. 2 Open the starting port 12 . The ease of entering a ball into the second starting port 12 is enhanced so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls he has. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning gate solenoid 92 to open the big winning gate 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power failure processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial process executing means 280 executes the control start process of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored. The main power-off process execution means 282 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the main substrate 200 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200 . The control start processing, abnormality handling processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Changing Means 286, Setting Confirming Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state described above. The setting change unit 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is changed to the setting change state. The setting change unit 286 sequentially changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in response to pressing of the setting change button 172 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . , the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173 . When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the setting confirmation state described above. The setting confirmation unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change unit 286 described above, the setting confirmation unit 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may be numbers "0" to "5" instead of numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , setting value “4” may correspond to setting 5, and setting value “5” may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the set value data is set to the initial value "0", it will not be determined to be abnormal. can be simplified. In addition, when executing a lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the prefetch process, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as the offset data. In addition, the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173 when numerical values of "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173 . In the latter case, the numeric data of "0" to "5" are converted into the numeric values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the manager of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for executing payout and the like to the payout control board 155, and a sub-controller that transmits control commands necessary for executing performance control and the like to the sub-board 300. A command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the judgment of the entering ball into each winning hole by the entering ball judging means 201 . Sends a command that indicates the status of an error that occurred in The sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command when starting the symbol variation.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 varies at the timing when the first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. Also, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303 . After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation display corresponding to the lottery starts immediately, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (first start opening 11, second start opening It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the type information of the port 12), the information of the number of reservations, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, on the side of the sub-board 300, it is possible to speculatively recognize the winning result before the turn to start pattern variation, based on the received preliminary determination result. Processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. Sub-control command transmitting means 207 is set by special game control means 260 information on the special game, information on the small winning game by small winning game control means 265, information on the lottery result by normal figure lottery means 213, setting change means 286 setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300 . Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits various kinds of control in the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing by the main initial process executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284, information on errors, and the like. information about various signals and the like to be sent to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes pattern mode determination means 301, pattern storage means 302, effect determination means 303, effect control means 304, timer means 307, effect setting means 308, sub-initial process execution means 360, sub-power-off process execution means 362, A sub-error detecting means 364 , a command receiving means 370 , and a sub-side prior determination means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of production patterns in which the content of the production image to be displayed on the production display device 60 and the display process thereof are determined when the decorative pattern 61 is changed. The performance patterns include a plurality of variable performance patterns in which the variation process from the start to stop of variation in the variable display of the decorative patterns 61 and the performance process are determined, and the degree of expectation for the big win displayed separately from the variable display of the decorative patterns. and a plurality of forewarning effect patterns that foretell the height of the variable display before stopping.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205 , and the sub-side preliminary determination means 371 holds the preliminary determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The effect determination means 303 includes normal effect determination means 373 and prefetch effect determination means 374 . The normal effect determination means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker 108, decides the effect content to be output to the decoration lamp 111 or the like. The effect determination means 303 determines the content of effect according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal effect determination means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232, and is selected from among a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern transmitted from the command communication means 205. Either one is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302 . The normal effect determination means 373 sends the information of the read variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304 . The normal effect determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. In addition, there may be a case where the variable effect pattern is determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the contents of the look-ahead effect determined by the look-ahead effect determination means 374 are varied. A production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determination means 374 more accurately specifies the result of this determination based on the result of prior determination from the command communication means 205, the result of prior determination in the past held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the result, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before this determination, and the execution contents are determined. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the prior determination result prior to the prior determination result received this time. determine whether or not to Based on the judgment result, it identifies the result of this judgment related to the pre-judgment result received this time, the selected variation pattern, etc., and determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution content of the pre-reading effect based on the specific result. . Since the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate in many parts of the effect determining means 303, the effect determining means 303 will be described as including both, except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determination means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of the effect image having the same variable time according to the change pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols 61 based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is determined according to the variation performance pattern of the design. The symbol mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control means 304 . The symbol mode determination means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three patterns. For example, when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 indicates a transition to a 4R big hit or a 10R big hit special game. , a specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. A specific combination such as "357" is also selected when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, but these specific combinations are not necessarily combinations of three symbols. It doesn't have to be. If the success/failure judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination such as "312" or "946" where the three symbols are not aligned, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R big hit or a small hit. Non-applicable combinations are selected. If the hit/fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and if a variation pattern that indicates an outlier with a reach is selected, a combination that does not have a single pattern such as "191" or "727" to select.

The variation display pattern of the decorative symbols defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, that is, the performance process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation. The variable effect patterns include a pattern for displaying a normal winning pattern, a pattern for displaying a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state in which one more pattern is aligned, and a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state. Contains patterns for when In particular, the pattern when passing through the reach state includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. A performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of decorative symbols having the same variation time as the special symbols according to the variation pattern of the special symbols.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 determines the variation for which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The effect content for time saving is an effect in which a background image or sound is output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or probability change.

The advance notice effect pattern is a effect pattern for temporarily displaying a specific character or motif image, animation, video, or the like, a effect pattern for moving a character, or a effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The performance by the foretelling performance pattern is executed in parallel with the pattern variation, and preliminarily suggests that the degree of expectation that the pattern variation is stopped in a jackpot mode is high. For example, there is a normal announcement effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group announcement effect in which a group of characters are displayed so as to pass from one end of the screen to the other. In addition, a step-up notice performance is further included in which the display process of the notice performance is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big win.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (post-read notice) for predicting the final stop state of the pattern by executing the effect at the timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern 61. There is also a pattern (notice before reach) that foretells at the same time that the production will be executed at a timing that is not always stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the preliminary performance on the performance display device 60 according to the determination result of the success or failure lottery or the preliminary determination result by a predetermined preliminary lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and should display it. To decide a notice performance pattern. A performance determining means 303 holds a preliminary announcement determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the preliminary performance, and a preliminary announcement type table to be referred to when selecting the kind of the preliminary performance pattern. The advance notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result of the lottery or the result of prior judgment, and the advance notice effect is displayed at a higher probability when the lottery is successful than when the lottery is lost. As described above, the correspondence relation between the determination result of the win/fail lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, the display of the advance notice effect itself can suggest a high degree of expectation for the big win.

The effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The production control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start the variation of the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of the new decorative pattern. When the performance determining means 303 determines to display the preliminary performance, the performance control means 304 displays the preliminary performance in accordance with the selected preliminary performance pattern on the performance display device 60 in a form superimposed on the performance of the symbol variation. Let

A performance control means 304 reserves the start of the pattern variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery when the win/fail lottery value of the second win/fail lottery is stored, and whether the win/fail lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is stored. The symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery is started regardless of whether or not. Thus, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read out and the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes 0, and the decorative design does not start to change. In this manner, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol 61. - 特許庁

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66 . The effect control means 304 has effect display control means 305 , sound control means 306 and lamp control means 309 . Effect display control means 305 controls display on the effect display device 60 , and audio control means 306 controls audio output from the speaker 108 . The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decoration lamp 111 .

During the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is varying. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is variably displayed, but other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, is regarded as the main performance content in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the pattern is fluctuating by variably displaying the substitute pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller in size than the normal-sized decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing from an alternative pattern, a normal-sized decorative pattern is also called a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern".

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for directing the result of the judgment result, and has a display form simplified (in other words, simplified, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and the normal decorative pattern It is displayed in a more simplified variation process than The alternative pattern has an external display form corresponding to the portion indicating the pattern type of the normal decorative pattern, for example, has a display form representing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the pattern type. In addition, the alternative pattern is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area where the decorative design is variably displayed. Typically, it is located at a position where it is difficult for elements other than the design to interfere with the main effect, such as a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuating display. The alternative pattern is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative pattern, but has a display form in which at least the type of pattern can be identified in appearance. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

A plurality of substitute patterns displayed in place of a plurality of normal decorative patterns suggest a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning lottery will be in an advantageous state for the player due to the combination of stop modes at the end of variation. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols suggest that the likelihood of a big win in the variation is high when two of the three alternative symbols are in a ready-to-win state. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state are “3” and “7”, which indicate that the expectations are relatively high, and the expectations are “1” and “2”. The degree of expectation of the reach state may be suggested by becoming a pattern of a type that suggests a relatively low degree. It should be noted that the alternative pattern does not appear to be in a definite stop state, but is in a temporary stop state in which slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. In addition, the display periods may overlap instead of displaying the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern exclusively. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued and the variation of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative design, the special design is fluctuating in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 while the first special design 51 and the second special design 52 are fluctuating with an image that is about the same as or smaller than the alternative design. A simple symbol suggesting that there is something may be variably displayed. The simple design may consist of a variable display of a combination of three patterns in the same way as the normal decorative design, or may consist of a variable display of a single design, or may be a simple symbol ("O", "X", etc.). may be configured in such a manner that they are sequentially switched. Simple patterns are not related to the variable display mode of normal decorative patterns and alternative patterns, and display constant fluctuations from the start of fluctuation of special patterns to the end of fluctuation. may be displayed as It should be noted that the simple symbols may be changed as long as the indication that the special symbols are being changed and the results of the special symbols are reported at least, and the simple symbols may be displayed in a combination of two symbols or the like. In addition, the simple design may also be called "sub-decorative design", "sub-design", "mini-decorative design", "mini-design", and the like. Aside from the effect display device 60, variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern that shows a display equivalent to the simple pattern by means of a light emitting mode such as an LED may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during variation of special symbols, display of results) in the event that a problem occurs in the effect display device 60 or the like. As an example of the display mode of the fourth pattern, the LED lights up in sequence as "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). Alternatively, the variable display may be suggested by blinking in a certain single color according to the type of special pattern, and the luminescent color at the time of stop display may suggest the type of loss or big win.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for games. The clock means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from power-on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that incorporates a battery and can continue to measure the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off or during a power failure may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is the possibility that slight differences may occur in the time of each game machine due to individual differences or time lags. is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronization effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 in a synchronization effect period which is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the pattern fluctuation and the game state. The synchronization performance period lasts for several minutes, its length is longer than one symbol variation time, and can include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronizing effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music piece and video is determined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for the synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

Synchronization performance is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or during a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, the "during normal game" includes (1) "normal game during variable display" in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which symbols are not displayed in variable display and the standby demo screen is not displayed. , and (3) ``Normal game during display of standby demo screen'' in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the variable display of symbols. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode for control such as volume reduction and brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). can be different from when Also, while the standby demo screen is being displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronization effect are output. It is suppressed, and screen display such as effect customization by the mobile cooperation system is given priority.

The synchronization effect is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined musical piece or video is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as "synchronization effect start time"). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronization effect may be the time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time on the hour or half past the hour based on the standard time. may be Alternatively, times may be set that may vary depending on the date or day of the week, not at regular intervals such as "every hour", but at different intervals such as one hour later, then three hours later, and so on. Intervals may vary by date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be designated by a game clerk for each game parlor. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the arrival of a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, a plurality of machines are powered on at the same time in an amusement arcade. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronizing effect is executed on the plurality of game machines all at once. As a result, the performance is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same music and images are played at the same time, creating a synergistic effect with a sense of realism, as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect is obtained.

The function of synchronized performance is similarly built in other game machines of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are simultaneously turned on by the game clerk every day. Then, all of the plurality of game machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronization performance start time almost at the same time, so that the synchronization performance can be executed all at once. This is called multi-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized across multiple units, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized across multiple units. increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes the history of game results and the history of performance results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the number of balls that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of variable probability, and the number of time reductions. Unlike game profits, the history of performance results is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of performance and the right to make it easier for specific types of performance to appear. It is information such as the score of For example, in order to convert the number of appearances of a predetermined effect or the result of a mini game into a score and give it to the player, encoded information indicating the score or game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained by decoding are accumulated in the player's mobile terminal. A cooperation system between the gaming machine and the mobile terminal of the player via the two-dimensional code will be described later. It should be noted that the score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). With this as an opportunity, the number of customizable items increases.

Effect setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of types of effect content options as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and game history. For example, a pattern storage means 302 prepares a plurality of types of performance patterns with different motifs, characters and music to be displayed as performance patterns to be displayed during special games, and the player is allowed to select which performance to display. It is assumed that Alternatively, a plurality of kinds of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern to display. In these cases, when the player operates the production button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, and the production pattern is selected through the operation, the production setting means 308 selects the contents of the selection. Remember. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308. - 特許庁

The sub-initial processing executing means 360 executes control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored. The sub-power-off process execution unit 362 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the sub-board 300 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300 . When the sub-error detection means 364 detects power interruption, the sub power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as power interruption processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player is registered as a user by setting an account and a password on the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354 in advance. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 causes the screen of the performance display device 60 to display the two-dimensional code 350 encoded with the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. - 特許庁Character information (also referred to as "password information") in which the player's identification information and performance score history are coded from the dedicated site is transmitted to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information through button operation such as the cross key 110 . The performance setting means 308 decrypts the entered password information and registers it as the identification information of the player and the performance score history, so that the player's previous game contents and performance score state can be handed over. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko game machine 100, with the progress of the game and the performance, the performance setting means 308 adds the score given to the player as a profit in the performance at any time and accumulates it as a performance score history, and the player , it is possible to carry out production customization at any time and select and set favorite elements as various production elements. Scores in the performance are basically added for each pattern variation, and higher scores are given to the kind of performance with a higher degree of expectation for shifting to the special game, and higher scores are given when shifting to the special game.

As effect customization, the player utilizes a part of the cumulatively acquired points, and according to the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that constitute the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 are changed. You can change production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable production element, and a different value is set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance is given to increase the customizable items. When a player operates a button to instruct the end of a game or performance customization, a performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and controls the performance display. Means 305 displays on effect display device 60 . The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354 . Further, the information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to a game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via transmission means such as display and reading of the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increase, so that points can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. As shown in FIG. The main substrate 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, a main ROM 292, and the like. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 , and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A ball entry signal from each ball entrance and a payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as winning opening solenoids, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the result of the win/fail lottery, the determination result of the pattern, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a two-byte configuration consisting of a combination of one-byte command type data called MODE data and one-byte command content data called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300 . The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 requires two transmissions of 1 byte each in order to transmit 2-byte command data due to the specification of transmitting 1-byte data per data transmission. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main circuit board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the sub circuit board 300 reads the same data twice in succession, the completion of transmission and reception of the data is determined. . The main substrate 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in succession, and transmits it up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, effect control device 313, and the like. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining a effect process and display pattern data defining a effect display process. A sub-control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , voice output, lighting of lamps, and performances by character actions. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and sound pattern data to effect control device 313 . In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but are separated and connected to each other. may be formed as a separate substrate with the

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. As shown in FIG. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320 , a control RAM 322 , a data ROM 324 , a display control circuit 326 and an audio control circuit 314 . The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding raw material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display and effect display as a effect object indicating the result of winning or failing lottery determination. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and lines of characters that are output during production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data designated by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. is executed by the control CPU 320 . As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits commands relating to effect display, effect image data, and motion data to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, the control CPU 320 transmits commands and audio data relating to audio output to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332 , a drawing memory 334 , a drawing circuit 336 , a frame buffer 338 and a display circuit 340 , each connected via a bus 330 . For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure generically represents buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334 , and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332 . The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60 .

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 . At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "general display pattern data" that defines the outline of the effect display process. For example, in the general display pattern data, a rough flow of a series of effect display processes is defined, such as the start and stop timing of variation of decorative patterns, the order of reproduction of a plurality of moving images, and the timing of start and stop of reproduction. . On the other hand, detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order for each frame to display moving images based on motion data. A process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the process from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other. ”. For example, when the effect control means performs specific processing based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In the modified example, even if the display pattern data is not divided into the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data", and the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324, good.

In this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313, a configuration including a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324 and a display control circuit 326 is shown. In a modification, control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320 , the control RAM 322 or the data ROM 324 . For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute processing that is supposed to be performed by the decoder 332 , the drawing circuit 336 and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326 . Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338 . In addition, the hardware configuration may not include the display control circuit 326 in the effect control device 313, in this case, the processing to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU320, the control RAM322 or the data ROM324 may be

Further, in this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300, a configuration including a production control device 313 in addition to the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311 and sub-ROM 312 is shown. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312 and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU310, the sub RAM311 or the sub ROM312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320 , the sub RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322 , and the sub ROM 312 may function as the data ROM 324 . In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. may

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the main board 200 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process executing means 280 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process executing means 280 . When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as setting internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y of S122), setting change processing is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N of S122), setting confirmation processing is executed (S126). In S105, if the setting key is OFF (N in S105), the processing of S122 to S126 is skipped.

Subsequently, according to the operating state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of data stored in the main RAM 291, power-off recovery processing or initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power interruption information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the power interruption recovery process is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power interruption information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (N of S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N of S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y of S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is checked (S110). As will be described later, if the processing was completed normally when the power was turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 uses the checksum to The data in the main RAM 291 are inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 are not normal (N of S112), the data in the main RAM 291 are initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y of S112), a process for returning to the state before the power was turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initialization of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Next, it clears the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off, and requests the command transmission of various information indicating the game state. Subsequently, a performance command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big prize winning port 20 are restored to the states before the power was turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) ends, a count value is set to start an interrupt process, which will be described later, and an interrupt timer starts operating (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) thereafter, and interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S132), the process of S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the setting change state is entered (S136), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation using the setting change button 172 (Y of S140), the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processing of S138 to S142 is repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden so that the setting values cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The setting confirmation state is entered (S156), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N of S160), the processing of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y of S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. to make the set value invisible (S162), and return.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) detects a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158, the power supply voltage monitoring circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 to execute power-off memory. In the process, the power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and when the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y of S206), executes the power-off process. Therefore, the process proceeds to S212. If the value of the power interruption confirmation flag does not match the power interruption confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol, An initial value random number update process is executed (S208), a timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is disabled (S202-S208), after the timer interrupt is enabled in S210, the interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

When power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the contents of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the power-on data was not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the power-on data has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, when the power is turned on next time, in order to check the backed-up data of the main RAM 291, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the loop continues until the power is turned off. Note that the above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing executing means 282 realized by the main CPU 290 .

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes interrupt processing. First, an interrupt operating condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd starting mouth effective period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol variation start monitoring control Processing (S334), Abnormality detection processing (S336), Ball passing time abnormality detection processing (S338), Game state display processing (S340), Handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), Launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch attached to the game board surface, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, door / frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal are monitored. , data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291 . The data indicating this input state consists of level data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt, and input port data at the time of the previous interrupt). This is data indicating a switch for which switching is observed by comparing the data of the input port by exclusive OR).

In various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value of each random number, the maximum value, and the initial value are read out from the main RAM 291, and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. Also, when the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 to update the initial value. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the range of the random number is completed. Then, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. An initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to zero. A similar process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of various control timers are read out from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting opening valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting opening 12 is set. In the second start port 12, there is an effective period during which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters and a lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and a prize ball payout and a second special symbol are executed even if a game ball enters. An invalid period is set during which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting opening 12, so the game ball enters the second starting opening 12. Even if it does, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting opening 11, the big winning opening 20, the first working opening 31, the second working opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "ordinary electric accessary product in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is valid is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. If the state of the normal pattern is not "ordinary electric accessories in operation", if the value of the second start opening effective extension timer is not 0, the second start opening valid period flag indicates that the second start opening 12 is valid. If the value of the second starting port valid extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second starting port is in the invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag.

In the prize winning monitoring process (S316), it is checked whether the game ball has passed through the switch. If so, update the win counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155 are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation opening 31 and the second operation opening 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32. When the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit value of 4, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number related to normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291 .

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol control is in progress, the process relating to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal design is "during normal design fluctuation", normal design fluctuation processing is executed, and when it is "normal design stop design display", normal design stop design display processing is executed, "normal electric If it is "in operation", the normal electric auditors operation process is executed, and if it is "demonstrating the end of normal electric auditors operation", the normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation process, after the normal symbol fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the normal symbol fluctuation stop setting is executed, and the state of the normal symbol is changed to " Set to "Normal symbol stop symbol display". In the normal pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is over, the operation end setting of the normal pattern corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, set the state of the normal pattern to "normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time of normal electric accessory operation start, and start normal electric accessory operation Execute the operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time. In the case of loss, the normal design state is set to "normal design fluctuation standby". When it is determined that the winning number of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessories 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings by monitoring the winning of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessories 90 of the game ball in the normal electric accessories operating process. , executes the operation end setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. When it is determined that the number of winning prizes of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum winning number, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored. When it is determined that the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening is completed, and the opening of the entrance of the series of normal electric accessories 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the normal electric accessories 90 and the second start opening valid Execute the extension time setting. When it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the ordinary electric accessory operation end demonstration process, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol Set to “Waiting for fluctuation”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal symbol fluctuation" and the value of the number of normal symbol operation pending balls is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is determined to start When it is determined to start the normal pattern variation, the number of normal pattern operation suspension balls is decremented, hit determination, stop pattern determination, normal pattern variation pattern number setting, and normal pattern variation time setting are executed. . After that, the state of the normal design is set to "during normal design fluctuation", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal design state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 winning and the second starting opening 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number, It is stored in the buffer as a special symbol per random number used in big hit determination. In addition, as the random number which relates to the special design, it acquires and remembers the design random number and the fluctuation pattern random number. When the reservation of the second special design is prioritized over the reservation of the first special design, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed. In addition to updating the pending status of the winning, the total pending number is updated and the winning order is stored. Subsequently, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number to be stored at the time of start-up winning, the state of the game machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is a command transmission period, a hit notice effect request, a winning pattern notice effect request, and a pattern notice Execute production requests in order. Here, (1) while waiting for a hit and while the probability variation function of the normal symbol is not operating, when storing the random number related to the first special symbol, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored while the probability variation function is not in operation, or (3) when the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored during the big win or the small win. , is the command transmission period. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of activated balls with special symbols has been updated. As described above, in pre-reading, four sets of preliminary determination information (preliminary correctness determination information, preliminary pattern determination information, and preliminary pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 . In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, if there is a ball entering the starting hole, it is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub-CPU 310 may make various judgments such as whether it is a period or not. Subsequently, the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is valid, the first starting opening winning prize In the same way as in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting opening winning a prize monitoring process is not executed. In addition, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and then the control processing related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessary product is in operation, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not in operation, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if "standby for special symbol variation", end the special symbol control general-purpose processing, and if "variation start", special symbol variation Start processing is executed, and if ``special symbol fluctuation is in progress'', special symbol variation in-process is performed, and if ``special symbol stop symbol display is in progress'', special symbol stop symbol display in-process is performed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub board 300 starts the effect display. Request a command for additional pattern information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special pattern to ``during special pattern variation'', and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special pattern variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol variation is performed, the variation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has ended, the special symbol variation stop setting is performed, and the special symbol state is changed to "special Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In a special pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is over, the operation end setting of the special pattern corresponding to the result of hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special design, the state of the special design is set to "waiting for special design fluctuation", the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, and the probability of special design The variable function, the variable time shortening function for special symbols, the probability variable function for normal symbols, the variable time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening extension function for normal electric accessories are deactivated, and the state of the game machine is prepared for the opening of the big winning mouth. Set to medium, set the winning start demonstration display time, command request for winning start demonstration effect, and command request for firing position specification effect (command request to execute effect that suggests recommended firing position such as "right shot") to run. When the result of the hit determination is a small win, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is requested. In order to end the operation of the special symbol, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol fluctuation", set the state of the gaming machine during the small winning start demonstration, set the winning start demonstration display time, set the winning start demonstration effect Execute the command request and the command request for the firing position designation effect. If the result of hit determination is lost, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is determined. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "standby for special symbol variation", and the command request for the launch position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric auditors control process (S330), in order to execute the processing related to the special electric auditors, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors is inspected, and the condition device is in operation or the special electric auditors are in operation If it is determined, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, processing during preparation for opening the special electric accessory, processing during operation of the special electric accessory, processing during closing of the large winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, small winning special electric In-operation processing, small-hit big winning opening closed processing, and small-hit end demonstration processing are executed.

In order to save the result of valid period determination of the big winning opening 20 in the big winning opening valid period setting process (S332), when the value of the big winning opening valid time is 0, the big winning opening valid period flag is set. Stores the mouth invalid period data, and when it is other than 0, stores the big winning mouth valid period data in the big winning mouth valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to start varying. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of special symbols is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) not during the big hit or the minor hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3) ) that the second special symbol is waiting for variation, and (4) that the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is other than 0, when all are satisfied, the special symbol is in a state where variation can be started. I judge. In addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls with special symbols must be other than 0, and (6) the relevant When the judgment is satisfied with the order of execution, that is, the order of winning, it is judged that the special symbols are ready to start changing.

When it is determined that the special pattern is ready to start fluctuating, the number of operation reserved balls of the special pattern is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is requested. As a result, the sub board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss based on the special symbol hit random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, determine the pattern. In the determination of the pattern, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit pattern is decided based on the special pattern per pattern random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit pattern is decided, and if it is a loss, it is a losing pattern. is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit pattern determined in the design determination process, the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol is determined, and the special symbol is determined. The game state after the end of the big win is set, such as the operating contents of the variable time shortening function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Subsequently, the settings during the big win are executed, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big prize opening. Subsequently, based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of normal symbols, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big win. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set with reference to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the small hit, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are set, and the hit The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame opening signal, and detects any change in the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub board 300 is requested to display the error state presentation of the game machine. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request for storing the error state and displaying the error state rendering is not executed.

In the entering ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous ON time of each switch level to detect the entering ball passing time abnormality, and measures the continuous ON time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of a counter that is incremented at each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the entry passage time abnormality, the command transmission request, and the security information output to the external information output terminal 160 Create an output claim in order. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the ball passing time abnormality. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error state, the number of normal symbols in operation pending balls, and the number of special symbols in operation pending balls, respective displays are displayed. Create data.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the steering wheel. Update, set the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and request to send a steering wheel state rendering command. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of activated balls of the special symbol, the number of activated suspended balls of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are displayed continuously. Initialization of the display to display the number of times it operates, display the operating state of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, display the hitting division, display errors, and display the prize ball ratio , acquisition and output of display data.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the firing of game balls, the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the setting of the prohibiting/permitting the firing corresponding to the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition/permission data, outputting the firing prohibition/permission signal is executed.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test equipment is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is obtained, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data output. The operating flag and operating timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operating flag and solenoid operating timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid activation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), it is checked whether or not there is a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired, and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

Random numbers used in the operation process of the main substrate 200 will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include random numbers per normal symbol and normal pattern variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to normal symbols, and random numbers per special symbol (hard random numbers) as random numbers related to special symbols. , special symbol per soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, as the random number for giving the initial value of the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, which is the initial value update type random number, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value per special symbol There are random numbers and soft default random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The random number per normal symbol is, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, the normal number of reserved symbol variations. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol random number is used for determination of hit determination and stop symbol when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The normal symbol variation pattern random number, for example, takes a value of 0 to 232, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. Normal symbol variation pattern random number, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt processing, the normal symbol variation is suspended. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used for determining the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is obtained when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of balls with the operation suspension of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , the values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are obtained, and the two are added together to generate and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol hit random number is used for executing the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol per symbol random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The special symbol per symbol random number is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of activated balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). , and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine a big hit symbol in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process, when the hit determination is a big hit.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is set to a predetermined number in the main RAM 291 when the game ball winning is confirmed when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol activated is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

Normal per symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special per symbol soft initial value random number are the same values as normal per symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the normal per symbol initial value random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special per symbol soft initial value random number are the normal per symbol random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol random number. When updating soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. be. That is, the normal per symbol random number, normal per symbol variation pattern random number, special per symbol random number, special per symbol soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the period from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer is calculated. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process varies depending on the game state, etc., the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) may be replaced with various random number update processes (S306) or initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random each time.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the sub board 300 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process executing means 360 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process executing means 360 . When starting to control the sub board 300, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Initialize the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. Thus, the sub-RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes, as interrupt processing executed with the highest priority, processing upon power-up and reset processing upon occurrence of various abnormalities when the watchdog function is enabled. As interrupt processing of priority level 7 with the next highest execution priority, there is processing of a command received from the main substrate 200. As interrupt processing of priority level 3, which has the next highest priority, detection of CPU runaway by a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The interrupt processing of priority level 2, which has the next highest priority, is processing related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320. The interrupt processing of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, is communication processing with the real-time clock. and various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If the interrupts related to the various processes described above occur simultaneously, the interrupts having the highest priority set in advance for each type of interrupt are preferentially executed. The processing shown in the figure consists of the highest priority level interrupt, which is processing at power-on and reset processing upon occurrence of various errors, and the reset processing upon detection of CPU runaway, which is priority level 3 interrupt. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the relevant model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). . All lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main processing of S518 does not return to this flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether or not the control program arranged in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and devices such as motors and solenoids are initialized (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of the decorative patterns is random (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is monitored (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a counter, in the case of the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the missing symbols. , the process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbols using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is received from the main board 200 in S552 as will be described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, reports the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546), An advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In addition, the advance notice lottery in S548 sends the notice effect command to appear immediately after the start of the pattern fluctuation to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, so that the lottery process is not processed in one loop, but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect to appear immediately after the start of pattern fluctuation is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, solenoid, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command is immediately after analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y of S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N of S554), the lottery soft random numbers are updated as low-priority processing that can be performed during idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol variation effect pattern is determined in the processing of S552, and when the analyzed command indicates a special symbol stop symbol, a lottery sheet is drawn. In the case of the method of determining the outlier pattern of the decorative pattern by using, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is decided in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200 . The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the highest priority next to reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main substrate 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is determined as a new command (Y of S600), and the determined command becomes the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y of S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606) and the original routine is returned to. By obtaining a hard random number every time there is an interrupt of a main command from the main board 200 in this manner, the randomness of the value is enhanced without generating periodicity in the timing of obtaining the random number. If the data read in S600 do not match two times in a row (up to five times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned to (N of S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N of S602), if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y of S608), the command buffer (command data (S610), and stores the first command and the second command in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. If the first command has not been received in S608, the process after S610 is skipped (N in S608) and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command relating to effect display from sub CPU 310 to control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data transmission to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 a command indicating normal reception on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned to. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N of S622), the processing after S624 is skipped and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320 . This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been received normally. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, solenoid and motor control for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a 1 ms cycle. Since the interrupt is of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the production button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure. , input/output of ports for inputting/outputting drive signals to devices to be controlled such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power failure is input, the process immediately proceeds to backup processing. Data related to device control is updated (S644), such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of buffers for writing data to the port in S642, and a timer is set to measure the timing of the performance. update (S646), update the timer for managing the effective input time of the production button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. to create a 16 ms period (S650).

Note that the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, in the case of counting a relatively long period of time, such as error reporting for 30 seconds, if one interrupt (1 ms) cycle count is used, the count value will be longer than necessary. The count value can also be shortened by using the count value of the period.

The task control has 16 kinds of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 . Lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and when the count values of the task control counter are 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring at a period of 8 ms is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that turns on and off every frame, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is running out of control, and the sub CPU 310 sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period, such as error notification for 30 seconds, as described above is decremented (S654), and error notification ends upon timeout.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol variation display. When the second success/failure lottery value is reserved (Y of S700), the second success/failure determination means 222 reads out the second success/failure lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 wins or fails (S702). The determination means 222 determines the stop pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and the variation start command is issued along with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub board 300 and the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52 is started (S716).

If the second lottery value is not reserved (N of S700) and the first lottery value is reserved (Y of S708), the first lottery determination means 221 performs the first lottery The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the first A variation pattern of one special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is transmitted to the sub board 300 together with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not reserved, the process from S710 to S722 is skipped (N of S708).

The special symbol pattern variation display is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display stops after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), a variation stop command is transmitted to the sub board 300 to stop the symbol variation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variation display of the special symbols is terminated. do.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the process of decorative symbol variation display. The effect determination means 303 of the sub board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the contents of the effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and the decorative symbols are stopped according to the received stop symbol, variation pattern, and success/failure determination result of the special symbol. A mode is determined (S752), and a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the premonitory setting is turned on by prior determination (Y of S756), the already determined variable effect pattern is a pattern that includes specific effect content that should be avoided from being displayed superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758), and if it is not a symbol change that triggered the turning on of the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting to display a predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is executed. If it is the symbol variation that triggered the turn-on (Y of S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not ON (N of S756), or if the specific effect content is included in the variable effect pattern (Y of S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

After that, the variable effect display of the decorative symbols is started (S766), the variable effect display process of the decorative symbols (S768), and the display process of the advance notice effect are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated (N of S772), and when a variation stop command is received (Y of S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774 ), and ends the decorative symbol variation effect (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts a special game effect process (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N of S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has passed ( Y in S804), but the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), but when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning hole. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N of S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y of S810), effect display. The control means 305 terminates the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, ie, variable probability, short working hours, easy entry state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game executed only once is started (S819), the big winning opening 20 is opened (S820), the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has passed (Y of S822), the big prize opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the set number of times of opening and closing has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of times of opening and closing, and the process returns to S820. (S828), if opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y of S826), the small hit game is terminated.

In the base technology, the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. , but in another example, the first game may be designed so that the expected value of winning balls is higher than that of the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected values of winning balls in the first game and the second game are substantially equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 7 times is executed with a probability of 100%, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. Also, in any case, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening, and if the game ball that entered the big winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is implemented. In this case, the special game executed when the second game results in a big hit is more likely to enter the specific area than the special game performed when the first game results in a big win. is high, and the probability that the normal game in the variable probability state is executed after the special game is finished may be configured to be high. For example, there are a first win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area. It may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second prize than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of getting the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of getting the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Example)
<Small hit rush>
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a game state in which the number of small-hit games per unit time increases, that is, the frequency of occurrence of small-hit increases, that is, a so-called small-hit rush can be executed. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine is (1) a parallel specification in which the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 can be changed in parallel at the same time, and (2) the small hit probability in the second winning lottery set to be relatively high (for example, the small win probability in the first win/lose lottery is lower than the small win probability in the second win/lose lottery, or there is no possibility of a small win); It is a spec that enhances the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in.

The specific gaming state of (3) above is, for example, a gaming state in which the probability fluctuates and the normal ball entry state. Here, as states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port 12, a normal ball entry state (hereinafter also referred to as a “low base state”) in which the ball entry ease is relatively low, and a ball entry state from the normal ball entry state. There is an easy ball entry state (hereinafter also referred to as “high base state”) in which ball ease is high. A normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as There is also a "low probability state") and a probability fluctuation state (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state") in which the probability of winning is higher than that of the normal probability state. In the present embodiment, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 is increased in the probability variation state and the normal ball entry state (hereinafter also referred to as "high probability low base state"). In addition, the "easy ball entry state" is a state in which the probability of winning the open lottery of the normal electric accessory 90 (so-called "electric tulip") is relatively high, and the normal electric accessory 90 is opened when the open lottery wins. It is one or more of the state of relatively lengthening the time and the state of relatively shortening the fluctuation time of normal symbols, and in this embodiment, it is the state of transitioning to all three states. point to In a modified example, one or two of these three conditions may not be satisfied. On the other hand, the normal entry state is a state in which the winning probability of the open lottery in the easy entry state is reversed, the length of the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90, and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are reversed. That is, the state in which the probability of winning the open lottery of the normal electric accessory 90 is relatively low, the state in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90 at the time of winning the open lottery is relatively short, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It is one or more of the relatively elongated states, and in this embodiment, refers to a state in which all three of these states have been reached. In a modified example, one or two of these three conditions may not be satisfied.

The pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment has specs that set the ball payout rate (so-called "machine discount") in the high-probability low-base state to 1 or more by frequently generating small wins in the second lottery. For example, when 100 balls can be fired per minute, continuous firing (1 100 shots per minute), 100 balls are launched per minute, and the expected value of the small winning game in 1 minute (average number of times the small winning game is executed in 1 minute) is 0.1 times ( As an example, a small win is won once every 10 minutes), the expected value of prize balls acquired in a small win game in 1 minute is 2 (for example, a prize ball Since the number is 10 and the average number of prizes won per small win game is 2.0, 0.1 x 10 x 2.0 = 2), and only the prize balls acquired by the small win game are considered. (That is, winning balls won by winning in the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, the general winning hole 33, etc. are not considered.) The ball output rate is 0.02. On the other hand, when the probability variation state and normal ball entry state (high probability low base state) are continuously fired to the second starting port 12 (100 balls per minute), 100 balls per minute. Assuming that the expected value of the small winning game in 1 minute (the average number of times the small winning game occurs in 1 minute) is 6.0 times for the launch of , the prize balls obtained in the small winning game in 1 minute The expected value is 120 (for example, the number of prize balls per one count of the big winning opening is 10, and the average number of prizes per small winning game is 2.0, so 6 x 10 x 2.0 = 120) , and the ball output rate is 1, considering only the prize balls obtained by the small winning game (that is, the balls obtained by winning the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the general winning port 33, etc. are not considered). .2. The small win rush ends when the high-probability low base state shifts to another game state with the occurrence of a predetermined big win as a trigger. As a modification, the specification of the number of times cut probability change (so-called "ST") is adopted, and the number of times of variation of the first special symbol 51 and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol 52 are changed without shifting to the special game during the high probability low base state. By shifting to a low probability low base state triggered by the total reaching a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the small hit rush may be terminated.

This embodiment proposes suitable control and effects in a pachinko game machine with a small winning rush. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as or correspond to elements that constitute the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology will be described by attaching the same reference numerals. In addition, the contents already explained in the base technology will be omitted as appropriate, and mainly the contents different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the base technology will be described.

FIG. 30 shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 of the embodiment. In the flow path on the right side of the game area 81, in other words, in the flow path through which game balls shot with relatively high strength flow, the operation port 506, the second start port 12, and the big winning port 20 are arranged in this order from the top. be done. The working port 506 corresponds to the second working port 32 in the base technology. Unlike the base technology, the working port of the present embodiment is provided only in the right channel in the game area 81, and the first working port 31 is not provided in the left channel. The passage detection device 508 corresponds to the second passage detection device 37 in the base technology.

When the game ball passes through the operating port 506, a normal symbol lottery (open lottery) is executed, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded. When the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded, most of the game balls flowing through the right channel of the game area 81 easily enter the second starting port 12 . On the other hand, the expanded normal electric accessory 90 covers and obstructs the flow path leading to the big winning opening 20, and as a result, the game ball becomes difficult to flow downstream of the second start opening 12, and as a result, the ball enters the big winning opening 20. difficult to do. That is, regarding the positional relationship between the second starting hole 12 and the big winning hole 20, the easiness of entering the big winning hole 20 when the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded is the same as that when the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded. The positional relationship is such that the easiness of entering the ball into the big winning hole 20 is reduced more than when it is not. Therefore, in the ball-entering easy state (high base state) in which the frequency of opening the normal electric accessory 90 increases, the possibility of a ball entering the big winning opening 20 is lower than in the normal ball-entering state (low base state). A game nail (not shown) is provided above the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second starting port 12 when the normal electric accessory 90 is closed. Accordingly, when the normal electric accessory 90 is closed, the game ball tends to flow downstream of the second starting port 12, and the possibility of entering the big winning port 20 is relatively increased.

FIG. 31 is a functional block diagram showing in detail specific game control means in FIG. The specific game control means 270 includes entering ball state setting means 510 and probability state setting means 512 . The ball-entering state setting means 510 sets the game state to either the normal ball-entering state or the easy-ball-entering state. The ball-entering state setting means 510 sets the game state to be switched from the normal ball-entering state to the easy-ball-entering state after the end of the special game, and changes from the easy-ball-entering state to the normal ball-entering state when the end of the easy-ball-entering state is reached. Set to switch the game state to the state. More specifically, when the game state at the time of the big hit is the low probability low base state and the big hit pattern of the first special pattern 51 is the 10R probability variable big hit pattern or the 4R probability variable big hit pattern, enter after the end of the special game. The game state is switched to the easy ball state, and the easy ball entry state is maintained until the next big win. In addition, when the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern 51 is the 4R normal jackpot pattern, the game state is switched to the ball-entering easy state after the special game is finished, and when the number of pattern fluctuations reaches 50 times, the ball-entering is easy. The game state is switched from the state to the normal ball entry state. It should be noted that during the execution of the special game, it is always in the normal ball entry state (the normal ball entry state is during the special game that is executed when the result of the winning judgment in the normal ball entry state is a big hit), and the execution of the small winning game. In the middle, the game state immediately before the start of the small winning game is inherited (the normal winning state is during the small winning game executed when the result of the winning judgment is the small winning in the normal entering state).

When the game state at the time of the big hit is the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state and the big hit pattern of the second special pattern 52 is the 10R probability variable big hit pattern or the 4R probability variable big hit pattern, enter after the end of the special game The game state is switched to the ball easy state, and the ball entry easy state is maintained until the next big win. In addition, when the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern 52 is the 2R normal jackpot pattern, the game state is switched to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game, and when the number of pattern fluctuations reaches 50 times, the ball entry is easy. The game state is switched from the state to the normal ball entry state. In addition, when the second special symbol 52 is a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol, the state does not shift to the ball-entering easy state. It should be noted that during the execution of the special game, it is always in the normal ball entry state (the normal ball entry state is during the special game that is executed when the result of the winning judgment in the easy ball entry state is a big hit), and the execution of the small winning game. In the middle, the game state immediately before the start of the small winning game is inherited (the easy ball entering state is executed during the small winning game executed when the result of the winning judgment in the easy entering state is a small winning).

The probability state setting means 512 sets the game state to either the normal probability state or the probability fluctuation state. The probability state setting means 512 sets the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the special game when a big hit with a probability change transition occurs, and when a big win without a probability change transition occurs, the special game. After the end, the game state is set to the normal probability state. It should be noted that during the execution of the special game, it is always in the normal probability state (it is in the normal probability state during the special game that is executed when the result of the winning judgment is a big hit in the normal entering state, and the winning judgment is in the easy entering state. During the special game executed when the result is a big hit, the state is normal probability), and during the execution of the small win game, the game state immediately before the start of the small win game is taken over During the small winning game executed when , it is in a normal probability state, and during the small winning game executed when the result of the winning judgment in the easy ball entry state is a small hit, it is an easy ball entry state).

FIG. 32 schematically shows a symbol determination table to be referred to in case of a big hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the jackpot symbol determination table of the present figure to stop the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 when the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit. to decide. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select a stop symbol indicating one of 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, 4R normal, 2R probability variation, and 2R normal as the jackpot symbol. The selectable stop symbols are different between the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 . The first symbol determining means 226 selects a stop symbol indicating any one of 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation and 4R normal as the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 . The second symbol determining means 227 selects a stop symbol indicating any one of 10R probability variation, 4R probability variation, 2R probability variation and 2R normal as the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 .

In the table of FIG. 32, a selection probability is set by allocating a lottery value in a different range for each type of stop symbol. In the case of the first special symbol 51, 10R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 0 to 24 (selection probability is about 10%), and 4R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 25 to 204 (selection probability is about 70%), and 4R normal is selected when the lottery value is 205-255 (selection probability is about 20%). In the case of the second special symbol 52, 10R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 0 to 89 (selection probability is about 35%), and 4R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 90 to 165 (selection probability is about 30%), 2R probability variation is selected when the lottery value is 166 to 204 (selection probability is about 15%), and 2R normal is selected when the lottery value is 205 to 255 (selection probability is about 20%). .

FIG. 33 is a game state transition diagram schematically showing the relationship between each game state and transition triggers. In the low-probability low base state 620, the main special symbol is the first special symbol 51, and the starting opening aimed at by the player is the first starting opening 11. - 特許庁When a so-called initial hit occurs in the low probability low base state 620, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot, the state transitions to a high probability high base state 624 (S900), and if a 4R normal jackpot, a low probability high base state. A transition is made to the base state 622 (S902). In the low-probability-high base state 622, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting port aimed at by the player is the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加When a big win occurs in the low-probability high base state 622, if the big win is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot, the transition is made to a high-probability high-base state 624 (S904), and if it is a 2R normal jackpot, the low-probability high base again. It becomes the state 622 (S906), and if it is a 2R probability variable big hit, it transits to the high probability low base state 626 (S905). In the low-probability high-base state 622, when the number of symbol variations reaches 50 times, which is the final stage of the easy-to-enter state, without the occurrence of a big hit, the state transitions to the low-probability low-base state 620 (S908).

In the high-probability high base state 624, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting port aimed at by the player is the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加In the high-probability high-base state 624, an effect mode in which a so-called battle effect is executed is displayed, in which predetermined characters (ally characters and strong enemy characters) fight each other. In this production mode, until the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit (that is, in the case of a small hit and a miss), the effect that the ally character runs at full speed and the degree of expectation for a big hit (or the degree of expectation for a variable hit) are suggested. When the result of winning/failure judgment is a big win, the announcement performance suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win (or the degree of expectation for the probability-variable big win) is executed, and then the battle performance is executed. In the battle effect, a pattern of a battle between characters is displayed as a effect to arouse whether or not a big hit to shift to a special game with a higher profit will occur. A 10R variable probability big win or a 4R variable probability big win, which is a big win with a large profit, occurs, and when the friend character is defeated, a 2R variable probability big win or a 2R normal big win, which is a big win with a relatively small number of unit games and a small profit, occurs. In FIG. 33, if the jackpot is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot, the high probability high base state 624 returns (S910). If it is a big hit, it transitions to the high probability low base state 626 (S914). The high probability high base state 624 continues until the next big win occurs.

In the high-probability low base state 626, the main special symbol is the second special symbol 52, and the starting port aimed at by the player is the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加High probability low base state 626 is when defeated in the battle production in high probability high base state 624 (2R
However, in this embodiment, the game state is more advantageous than the high probability high base state 624 in which a small hit rush is executed. The production mode in the high-probability low-base state 626 is a production mode in which a production (details will be described later) of repeatedly fighting weak enemy characters that are different from the strong enemy characters to be fought in the battle production described above is executed. becomes. In this production mode, until the result of the success/failure judgment is a big hit, the result of the success/failure judgment is a small hit, so that the effect of defeating weak enemy characters one after another is executed, and the result of the success/failure judgment is a big hit. When it becomes, the above-mentioned battle production is executed after the advance notice production suggesting the degree of expectation for the big hit (or the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot) is executed. The high-probability low base state 626 continues until the next big win occurs, and the game state is maintained in the high-probability low base state 626 even if the small win occurs once or continuously. When a big win occurs in the high probability low base state 626, if the big win is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot, the state transitions to a high probability high base state 624 (S916), and if a 2R normal jackpot, a low probability high base state. 622 (S918), and if it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, it will return to the high probability low base state 626 (S920).

FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing the propriety determination table in this embodiment. Reference is made instead of the table of FIG. 5 in the base technology. The hit/fail determination table of this embodiment is set so that the small hit probability in the second win/fail lottery is relatively high. That is, the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means 222 is a small hit is higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 is a small success. Alternatively, the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means 222 may be a small hit. For example, the lottery value range corresponding to the small win is determined to be wider in the second lottery than in the first lottery (the lottery value range corresponding to the small win in the first lottery may not exist, i.e. "0" is fine.). Small hit game control means 265, when the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means 222 is a small hit, or at least one of the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 When the result is a small win, a small win game with opening the big winning hole 20 is executed.

As illustrated, in both the first lottery by the first lottery determination means 221 and the second lottery lottery by the second lottery lottery by the second lottery determination means 222, the lottery value is 0 to 209 in the normal state (that is, low probability state). It will be a big hit only when it falls within the range of. When the odds are variable, the range of the big win is expanded, and the big win is achieved not only when the win/fail lottery value falls within the range of 0-209, but also when it falls within the range of 210-1299. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state. In this figure, a single hit/fail determination table shows the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability, but the hit/fail determination table may be prepared separately for normal time and for variable probability. It may be separately prepared for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery. If the winning lottery value acquired by the second winning judgment means 222 falls within the range of 1300 to 50899, it becomes a small hit, but if the winning lottery value acquired by the first winning judgment means 221 falls within the range of 1300 to 50899. However, it will not be a small hit and will be out. Also, in both the first lottery by the first lottery determination means 221 and the second lottery lottery by the second lottery lottery by the second lottery determination means 222, if the lottery value falls within the range of 50900 to 65535, the lottery is out. In this way, the "minor win" is associated only with the second lottery, and is not associated with the first lottery, so it can be applied only in the second lottery. The small-hit probability of the second success/failure lottery in the embodiment is 1/1.32, while the small-hit probability of the first success/failure lottery is zero. The small winning probabilities of the first winning lottery and the second winning lottery are constant regardless of the game state. In this figure, an example is shown in which the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are implemented in the form of a single win/fail determination table, but they may be implemented as separate tables. In addition, the "small hit" may also be applicable in the first win/loss lottery, but the range of the win/fail lottery value in that case is the range of the win/fail lottery value associated with the small win in the second win/fail lottery. set narrower. For example, the small hit probability of the first lottery may be set to a low probability of about 1/400.

The probability that the result of the success/failure determination corresponding to the entry into the second starting port 12, that is, the variation result of the second special symbol 52 is a small hit is very high. Therefore, a game method is conceivable in which the game ball is always aimed at the second starting hole 12 (that is, always hits to the right) and aims to win a small hit, but this is not the original game nature intended by the designer. do not have. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state is made relatively low, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in the high probability low base state is made relatively high. The variation efficiency can be said to be the number of pattern variations per predetermined unit time. In the embodiment, in the high-probability low-base state, the number of variations per unit time of the second special symbol 52 is increased. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 determine the variation pattern of the special symbol according to one of the plurality of criteria. In the embodiment, the first variation pattern determining means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 according to a predetermined variation pattern table for the first special symbol 51 .

The second variation pattern determining means 232 is a variation pattern determined to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol 52 in the high probability low base state as the variation time of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state. Determine the variation pattern based on the table. The second variation pattern determining means 232 selects a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 minutes, for example, when the result of the second lottery is out in the low-probability low-base state. As a result, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 is relatively high in the high probability low base state and relatively low in the low probability low base state.

The second variation pattern determining means 232 is the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the high base state, the variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter than the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state. A variation pattern is determined based on the pattern table. The high base state referred to here includes a high probability high base state and a low probability high base state. The high base state is a game state to be shifted after the special game is finished, and the next big hit occurs, or the total number of fluctuations of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 reaches a specific number, for example, 50 times. It continues until it reaches (as described above, if the 10R probability variation jackpot pattern or the 4R probability variation jackpot pattern stops, it continues until the next jackpot occurs). When the total number of fluctuations reaches a specified number of times, the state is shifted to the low base state. Thus, in the high base state, which is the period from the end of the special game until the occurrence of the next big hit or the period until the number of symbol variations reaches 50 times, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 is increased, and the normal electric drive is performed. As a result of the accessory 90 being opened with high frequency, the easiness of entering the ball into the big winning opening 20 is lowered.

When the total number of variations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 reaches 50, which is the end of the high base state, the entering state setting means 510 sets the normal entering state. The end of the high base state is set to 50 times for the 4R normal jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot, both of which are low-probability states. Therefore, after the high-base state ends, the low-probability low-base state is entered. When moving to the low probability low base state, the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a normal variation pattern in which a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52. A variation pattern is determined based on the selection criteria. On the other hand, only in the case of the 2R probability variable big hit, the high-probability low-base state and the small-hit rush state occur after the end of the special game.

In general, in a high base state, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as a variation pattern for special symbols, and in a low base state, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as a variation pattern for special symbols. easy to be However, in the high-probability low base state, which is a small hit rush, in order to increase the variation efficiency of the second special symbol even in the low base state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively short variation time. Easy to select patterns. The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state as the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 in the high probability low base state. A variation pattern is determined based on a special variation pattern table for easy small hit rush. The second variation pattern determination means 232 selects an ultra-short variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second, for example, when the result of the second lottery is out in a high probability low base state (small hit rush).

Based on the above basic configuration of the small hit rush, individual features will be described below. In addition, differences between the specifications of each embodiment and the basic configuration will also be explained as appropriate.

<Embodiment 1> Termination conditions of the easy-to-enter state according to the game state In the high-base state, it is assumed that the player hits the ball aiming at the second start hole 12, that is, hits to the right. . In addition, it becomes difficult for the ball output rate in the high base state (the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of batted balls per predetermined time) to exceed 1 (i.e., the state in which the number of winning balls exceeds the number of batted balls). Therefore, it is conceivable to end the high base state, which is the easy ball entry state, as soon as possible without prolonging it unnecessarily. For example, the occurrence of the next big hit is one of the final stages of the easy-to-enter state. By closing the electric accessory 90, it is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12 during the pattern variation, and to easily avoid an increase in the ball output rate more than necessary. Such specifications make it easier for game machine developers to keep the payout rate within a preferred range.

However, when a player who is familiar with the specifications and characteristics of the game machine plays the game, the normal electric accessory 90 is not released during the reach fluctuation, and the result of the win/loss determination related to the pattern fluctuation is a big hit. There is a possibility that it will be done. On the other hand, depending on the game state, the reach variation effect is executed only when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit (for example, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is out only in the high probability high base state 624 A specification in which the reach variation effect is not executed and the above-described battle effect is not developed, or only when the result of the win/loss determination is a big hit only in the high probability high base state 624, the reach change effect is executed and the battle effect described above is developed. specifications) are also conceivable. Therefore, in the first embodiment, different conditions depending on the game state are used as conditions for ending the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 35 is a time chart showing the relationship between the state of symbol variation and the end condition of the easy-to-enter state. FIGS. 35(a) and (b) show that the end conditions are different in the two game states. In the first gaming state (FIG. 35(a)), which is one of the easy-to-enter states, the ball-entering state setting means 510 sets the result of the win-or-fail judgment by the first win-or-fail judgment means 221 or the second win-or-fail judgment means 222. is a big hit, the easy-to-ball-enter state is terminated assuming that the end condition is satisfied at the start of the pattern variation related to the result of the win/loss determination. The first gaming state referred to here is the high probability high base state 624 . The upper part of FIG. 35(a) shows the state of symbol variation, etc., and the lower part shows the on/off state of the easy-to-enter state. First, after super shortened symbol variations 630 and 632 are displayed with the easy-to-enter state being ON, when the big-hit reach variation 634 is started (S930), the easy-to-enter state is turned off and terminated. , At least until the period of the subsequent special game 636, it will be in a normal entering state.

In the second game state (FIG. 35(b)), which is one of the ball-entering easy states and is different from the first game state, When the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, the easy-entering state is terminated assuming that the end condition is satisfied at the end of the symbol variation related to the result of the success/failure determination. The second game state referred to here is the low probability high base state 622 . In FIG. 35(b), similarly to (a), the upper part shows the state of symbol variation, etc., and the lower part shows the on/off state of the easy ball entry state. First, after the ultra-short symbol variations 640 and 642 are displayed as the easy-to-enter state is ON, the easy-to-enter state continues to be ON even when the jackpot reach variation 644 is started (S932). After that, when the reach variation 644 is ended (S934), the easy ball entry state is turned off and ended, and the period of the special game 646 after that is the normal ball entry state. It should be noted that, when the out-of-range reach variation is executed, the easy-ball-entering state continues to be ON even after the reach variation ends. In a modification, the first game state and the second game state may be the same game state, for example, both may be the high probability high base state 624 . In another modification, the timing when the easy-to-enter state in the first gaming state is turned off is the end of reach fluctuation 644 as shown in FIG. 35(b), and the easy-to-enter state in the second gaming state is The timing of turning off may be the start of reach fluctuation 634 as shown in FIG. 35(a).

In the high-probability high base state 624, it is possible to develop the battle presentation by executing the reach variation presentation only when the result of the win/fail determination is a big win. The right/wrong determination here mainly refers to the right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means 222 , but may include the right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means 221 . In the reach variation performance in the high-probability high base state 624, confirmation of the big win is suggested by the fact that a plurality of decorative symbols are in the reach mode, and whether or not the big win accompanies the shift to the probability variation state is determined in the remaining performance. It will stimulate the player through the production. The jackpot that occurs in the high-probability high-base state 624 is a so-called consecutive-chan jackpot, and under the high-probability state, the next jackpot is already guaranteed. It can be said that it is whether the next big hit is accompanied by a probability change or not. Therefore, even if the player knows that the big win is confirmed at the start of the reach variation effect (reach variation 634) (S930), the player's expectation is hardly spoiled. In addition, since the decision of the big hit is suggested at the start of the reach fluctuation production or the establishment of the reach, in order to incite the occurrence of the big hit from before the start of the pattern fluctuation, the possibility of the occurrence of the reach and the possibility of the probability variable jackpot due to the so-called foreseeing You may make it perform the notice production which suggests.

On the other hand, in the low-probability high base state 622, the reach variation effect can be executed even when the result of the win/loss determination by the first win/fail determination means 221 or the second win/fail determination means 222 is a big hit. Therefore, at the start of the reach variation effect (reach variation 644) (S932) and at the end of the symbol variation (S934), the easy-to-enter ball state is set so that the player does not know whether or not it is a big hit during the symbol variation. terminate. The acceptance/rejection determination referred to here mainly refers to the acceptance/rejection determination by the second acceptance/rejection determination means 222 , but may also include the acceptance/rejection determination by the first acceptance/rejection determination means 221 . When the reach variation performance is executed in the low-probability high base state 622, the battle performance is developed in the same manner as in the high-probability high base state 624, but the easy-to-enter ball state is terminated at the start of this reach variation performance or during pattern variation. never. As a modification, when the reach variation effect is executed in the low probability high base state 622, the battle effect is not developed, and other effects (for example, a mission effect in which if a treasure is found, it becomes a success and a big hit is announced. etc.) may be developed, and even in such a case, the easy-to-enter state is not ended at the start of the reach variation effect or during the pattern variation.

In the first embodiment, the specification may be such that the first game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game are not simultaneously executed at least in the high base state. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed, the main display control means 250 makes the other variably displayed stand by, and at least when the variation start timing comes in the high base state. Even if the lottery value is reserved as the second reservation, the execution of the first reservation, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol 51 is preferentially executed. For example, if the easy ball entry state is ended at the start of the big hit pattern variation of the second special symbol, the ball is hit not at the second start port 12 where the normal electric accessory 90 is difficult to open, but at the first start port 11. It is also conceivable. As a result, not only the second reservation but also the first reservation lottery value may be reserved, but the main display control means 250 gives priority to the first reservation and preferentially the first special figure control means 251 displays the first special symbol 51 variably. In this case, the frequency with which the second special symbol 52 fluctuates, that is, the digestion speed of the second reservation is slowed down, and the ball payout rate of the second game in the high base state is less likely to exceed 1, and the ball payout rate is set within an appropriate range. easier to control.

The first variation pattern determining means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 so that the non-reach loss variation time of the first special symbol 51 becomes relatively long in the high probability high base state 624 . For example, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined such that the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 is longer than the reach-zero deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 . Further, for example, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the reach-free loss variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high base state is longer than the reach-free loss variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the low base state. may The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to be relatively long when the number of first reservations reaches a predetermined number or more, or may be longer as the number of first reservations increases. may decide. As a result, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of digestion of the second hold becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. As a modification, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively short in the high probability high base state 624 . For example, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is shorter than the reach-zero deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52, and for example, a high base. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the state is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the low base state, The variation time of 1 special symbol 51 may be determined to be relatively long when the number of first reservations reaches a predetermined number or more, or determined to be longer as the number of first reservations increases. You may In this way, the speed at which the second suspension is completed increases as the ball is hit toward the first start opening 11, so the speed at which the second suspension is completed can be adjusted according to the player's hitting style.

However, the above-mentioned determination that the non-reach out variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively long is not performed in the high probability high base state 624 immediately after the so-called first hit, and the high probability high base state during the consecutive chan. 624 only. That is, in the low-probability low-base state 620, the high-probability high-base state 624 that is shifted when the result of the hit-or-fail judgment by the first success-or-failure determination means 221 or the second success-or-failure determination means 222 is a big hit, the high The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so as to be relatively shorter than the deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high-probability base state 624 . This is to avoid the stagnation of the game immediately after the first hit, since there is a good possibility that the first hold still remains immediately after the first hit. In addition, in the high probability high base state 624, the first special symbol 51 is shifted to the high probability high base state 624 when the result of the success judgment by the first success judgment means 221 or the second success judgment means 222 is a big hit. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the deviation variation time is relatively long. As a further modification, the above-mentioned determination that the non-reach out variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively long is not performed in the high probability high base state 624 during the consecutive chan, and the high probability immediately after the first hit It may also be performed only in the high base state 624 . That is, in the high-probability high-base state 624, when the result of the win-or-fail judgment by the first win-fail determination means 221 or the second win-fail determination means 222 is a big hit, the high-probability high-base state 624 is shifted to the low-probability low-base state. Relatively shorter than the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high probability high base state 624 shifted when the result of the success judgment by the first success judgment means 221 or the second success judgment means 222 in 620 is a big hit You may determine the variation pattern of the 1st special design 51 so that it may become. In this way, immediately after the first hit, when there is a good possibility that the first hold still remains, the user can congratulate the transition to the high probability high base state 624 or play the game in the high probability high base state 624. It is possible to secure the time for executing a special effect such as explaining the nature and the contents of the effect as a variable time.

As a modified example, the specifications may be such that the first game and the second game can be executed in parallel at the same time. The main display control means 250 can variably display the first special symbol 51 even when the second special symbol 52 is varying, and the second special symbol 52 can be displayed even when the first special symbol 51 is varying. Variable display is possible. The second variation pattern determination means 232, in the high probability high base state 624, when the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.), the second special symbol 52 reach-less deviation variation A variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the time is relatively long. For example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The second special symbol 52 reach-free deviation fluctuation time is the second special when the number of first reservations is 0 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the symbol 52, or the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 regardless of the number of first reservations. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 . Also, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52. Also by these, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of digestion of the second suspension becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 is the second special symbol when the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the reach-less deviation variation time of 52 becomes relatively short. For example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The second special symbol 52 reach-free deviation fluctuation time is the second special when the number of first reservations is 0 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be shorter than the reach-free deviation variation time of the symbol 52, or the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 regardless of the number of first reservations. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is shorter than the reach-less deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51, and for example, the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is large The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shortened. In this way, the speed at which the second suspension is completed increases as the ball is hit toward the first start opening 11, so the speed at which the second suspension is completed can be adjusted according to the player's hitting style.

As another modification, the main display control means 250 may be designed to preferentially execute the second game so that the first game and the second game are not executed simultaneously. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is to be variably displayed, the main display control means 250 causes the other variably displayed to stand by, while the second special symbol 52 is at the timing of starting to variate. In this case, even if the lottery value is reserved as the first reservation, the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is preferentially executed. The second variation pattern determining means 232 determines that when the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.), the deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 A variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so as to be relatively long. For example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The second special symbol 52 reach-free deviation fluctuation time is the second special when the number of first reservations is 0 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the symbol 52, or the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 regardless of the number of first reservations. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 . Also, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52. Also by these, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of digestion of the second suspension becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 is the second special symbol when the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the deviation variation time of 52 is relatively short, for example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) ), the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is changed so that the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of the first reservations is 0. Alternatively, regardless of the number of first reservations, the second special symbol 52 is so that the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-zero deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51. Also, for example, in the high probability high base state 624, the larger the number of the first reservations, the shorter the reach-less deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 of the second special symbol 52 A variation pattern may be determined. In this way, the more the ball is hit toward the first start hole 11, the faster the speed of the second suspension is completed.

As yet another modification, the main display control means 250 may be designed to execute the first game and the second game in the order in which the balls are entered so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed, the main display control means 250 waits for the other variably displayed, while entering the ball into the first starting port 11 and the second special symbol 52. The order of entering the ball into the starting port 12 or the order of the first reservation and the second reservation are stored, and the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the variable display of the second special pattern 52 is started according to the order. Also in this case, the second variation pattern determination means 232, in the high probability high base state 624, the number of the first pending is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) second special symbol 52 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the deviation variation time is relatively long. For example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The second special symbol 52 reach-free deviation fluctuation time is the second special when the number of first reservations is 0 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the symbol 52, or the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 regardless of the number of first reservations. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 . Also, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52. Also by these, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of digestion of the second suspension becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 is the second special symbol when the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the deviation variation time of 52 is relatively short, for example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the reach-free loss variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free loss variation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of the first reservations is 0. Alternatively, regardless of the number of first reservations, the second special symbol 52 is set so that the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51. A variation pattern may be determined, and for example, in the high probability high base state 624, the variation of the second special symbol 52 so that the larger the number of first reservations, the shorter the reach-less deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52. A pattern may be determined. In this way, the speed at which the second suspension is completed increases as the ball is hit toward the first start opening 11, so the speed at which the second suspension is completed can be adjusted according to the player's hitting style.

In still another modified example, as a termination condition of the easy-to-enter state, when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, the termination condition is when the stop symbol fixation of the symbol variation related to the result of the success/failure determination is started or when the stop symbol fixation ends. The easy ball entry state may be terminated assuming that Here, "fixed stop pattern" is a period during which the fixed stop mode of the special pattern is maintained. After the "stop symbol fixation" continues for a predetermined time, the "stop symbol fixation" ends, and the next symbol variation is started. In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit, the easy-to-enter state may be terminated assuming that the end condition is satisfied at the start or end of the symbol variation related to the result of the success/failure determination, or a small hit game. The easy-ball-entering state may be ended assuming that the end condition is satisfied at the start or end of the start effect. Or, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, N seconds after the start of the pattern variation related to the result of the hit/fail judgment (N may be a fixed value or a variable value according to the hit pattern good), the easy-ball-entering state may be terminated assuming that the termination condition is satisfied. Further, each of the examples of the end condition of the easy-to-enter state described above is not limited to the case where the first game state is the high-probability high base state 624, and the first game state is the low-probability low-base state 620, the low-probability Either the high base state 622 or the high probability low base state 626 may be applied. Moreover, not only when the second game state is the low probability high base state 622, but also when the second game state is any of the low probability low base state 620, the high probability high base state 624, and the high probability low base state 626. May be applied. Furthermore, it may be applied when the first game state and the second game state are the same game state.

<Second embodiment> Conditions for ending the easy-to-enter state after that according to the jackpot pattern Since the basic configuration of the second embodiment is common to the first embodiment, the description of the common points is omitted, and the first embodiment The description will focus on the differences from the example. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the end conditions for the easy-to-enter state are based on different end conditions depending on the types of jackpot symbols.

When the type of the special symbol is the first jackpot design when the result of the hit/fail determination by the first right/wrong determination means 221 or the second right/wrong determination means 222 is the jackpot, the input with the first condition as the end condition. It shifts to the first game state, which is the ball easy state. When the type of the special symbol is the second jackpot pattern when the result of the hit/fail judgment by the first right/wrong determination means 221 or the second right/wrong determination means 222 is the jackpot, the input with the second condition as the end condition. It shifts to the second game state which is the ball easy state. For example, the first big-hit symbol may be a big-hit symbol with variable probability, and the second big-hit symbol may be a big-hit symbol without variable probability. For example, the first condition, which is one of the end conditions, is the start of pattern variation according to the result of the win/loss determination when the result of the win/loss determination is a big hit, and the second condition, which is one of the end conditions, is The condition may be the end of the pattern variation related to the result of the success/failure determination when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit. For example, the first game state may be a high-probability high base state 624 and the second game state may be a low-probability high-base state 622, or the first game state may be a low-probability high-base state 622. and the second gaming state may be a high probability high base state 624 . Here, as a further modification in the above, (1) both the first and second jackpot patterns may be jackpot patterns with probability variation, that is, any jackpot pattern has a high probability It may shift to a base state 624, and in that case, the high-probability high base state 624 shifted with the first jackpot pattern as a trigger may be set as the first game state, and shifted with the second jackpot pattern as a trigger. The high-probability high base state 624 may be the second gaming state, and (2) both the first and second big-hit patterns may be big-hit patterns that do not involve probability variation, that is, any of the big-hit patterns. However, it may shift to the low probability high base state 622, and in that case, the low probability high base state 622 shifted with the first jackpot pattern as a trigger may be the first game state, and the second The low-probability high-base state 622, which is shifted with the jackpot pattern as an opportunity, may be set as the second game state. It is supplemented that this modified example is applicable to the embodiments described later.

FIG. 35(a) shows that the first jackpot pattern is a jackpot pattern with probability variation, and after the end of the special game, the first condition, that is, the start time of the jackpot pattern fluctuation is set as the ending condition. to As in the first embodiment, after the ultra-short symbol variations 630 and 632 are displayed with the easy-to-enter state being ON, the easy-to-enter state is turned off when the jackpot reach variation 634 is started (S930). and is terminated, and at least the state of normal ball entry is maintained until the period of the special game 636 thereafter.

FIG. 35(b) is a low-probability, high-base state where the second jackpot pattern is a jackpot pattern that does not involve probability variation, and after the special game ends, the second condition, ie, the end of the jackpot pattern variation, is the end condition. Go to 622. As in the first embodiment, after the ultra-short symbol variations 640 and 642 are displayed with the easy-to-enter state being ON, the easy-to-enter state remains ON even when the jackpot reach variation 644 is started (S932). Continued. After that, when the reach variation 644 is ended (S934), the easy ball entry state is turned off and ended, and the period of the special game 646 after that is the normal ball entry state.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the normal electric accessory 90 is closed during the reach fluctuation with a particularly long fluctuation time to suppress the ball entering the second starting port 12, It is possible to make it easier to avoid an increase in the ball output rate more than necessary. Such specifications make it easier for game machine developers to keep the pay-out rate within a preferred range.

As a modification, as described above, the first game state and the second game state may be the same game state. As a result, even if the game state of the transition destination is the same, it is possible to set different end conditions according to the types of the jackpot symbols.

In another modified example, for example, the first condition of the end condition is that the number of symbol variations after transitioning to the easy-to-ball state reaches a predetermined number, and the second condition of the end condition is the success/failure determination. It may be the case that the result is a small hit, or the case that the result of the success/fail judgment has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) (the second condition is the latter In that case, the predetermined number of times to be set may be changed according to the jackpot pattern). In this case, if a big win is achieved with the first big-hit pattern, the transition is made to an easy-entering state until the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number after the end of the special game, and if a big win is made with the second big-hit pattern, the special game is played. After the end of, until a small hit occurs, it shifts to an easy ball entry state. Only one of the first condition and the second condition may be adopted, that is, the end condition of the easy-to-enter state may adopt only the first condition regardless of the jackpot pattern. However, only the second condition may be adopted. Moreover, as a more preferable example, the first condition and the second condition may be combined. For example, (1) either the number of pattern variations after transitioning to the easy-ball entry state reaches 100 or the result of the winning/failure determination after the transition to the easy-ball entry state is a small hit. or (2) the number of pattern variations after transitioning to the easy-ball state reaches 100, or the success/failure determination is made after transitioning to the easy-ball state. The easy-ball-entering state may be terminated when either the number of times that the result is a small hit reaches 50 or the satisfaction of either one of these conditions is satisfied.

Other configurations and modifications are the same as those of the first embodiment. For example, the specification may be such that the first game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game are not simultaneously executed at least in the high base state. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed, the main display control means 250 makes the other variably displayed stand by, and at least when the variation start timing comes in the high base state. Even if the lottery value is reserved as the second reservation, the execution of the first reservation, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol 51 is preferentially executed. In this case, the frequency with which the second special symbol 52 fluctuates, that is, the digestion speed of the second reservation is slowed down, and the ball payout rate of the second game in the high base state is less likely to exceed 1, and the ball payout rate is set within an appropriate range. easier to control.

For example, the first variation pattern determining means 231, in the first gaming state (for example, high probability high base state 624), similarly to the first embodiment, the reach-less deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 relatively A variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to be longer. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 may be determined to be relatively long when the number of first reservations reaches a predetermined number or more, or it becomes longer as the number of first reservations increases. may be determined as As a result, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of digestion of the second hold becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. However, as in the first embodiment, the determination that the non-reach out variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively long is not performed in the high probability high base state 624 immediately after the so-called first hit. It may be implemented only in the high probability high base state 624 . That is, in the low-probability low-base state 620, the high-probability high-base state 624 that is shifted when the result of the hit-or-fail judgment by the first success-or-failure determination means 221 or the second success-or-failure determination means 222 is a big hit, the high The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so as to be relatively shorter than the deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 in the high-probability base state 624 . In addition, in the high probability high base state 624, the first special symbol 51 is shifted to the high probability high base state 624 when the result of the success judgment by the first success judgment means 221 or the second success judgment means 222 is a big hit. The variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined so that the deviation variation time is relatively long. As a modification, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the non-reach deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively short in the high probability high base state 624 . For example, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is shorter than the reach-zero deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52, and for example, a high base. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol 51 may be determined so that the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the state is shorter than the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 in the low base state, The variation time of 1 special symbol 51 may be determined to be relatively long when the number of first reservations reaches a predetermined number or more, or determined to be longer as the number of first reservations increases. You may In this way, the speed at which the second suspension is completed increases as the ball is hit toward the first start opening 11, so the speed at which the second suspension is completed can be adjusted according to the player's hitting style. As a further modification, the above-mentioned determination that the non-reach out variation time of the first special symbol 51 is relatively long is not performed in the high probability high base state 624 during the consecutive chan, and the high probability immediately after the first hit It may also be performed only in the high base state 624 . That is, in the high-probability high-base state 624, when the result of the win-or-fail judgment by the first win-fail determination means 221 or the second win-fail determination means 222 is a big hit, the high-probability high-base state 624 is shifted to the low-probability low-base state. In 620, the first special symbol 51 in the high probability high base state 624 shifted when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 or the second success/failure determination means 222 is a big hit. You may determine the variation pattern of the 1st special design 51 so that it may become. In this way, immediately after the first hit when there is a good possibility that the first hold still remains, the user can congratulate the transition to the high-probability high base state 624 or play the game in the high-probability high base state 624. It is possible to secure the time for executing a special effect such as explaining the nature and the contents of the effect as a variable time.

Also, for example, the specifications may be such that the first game and the second game can be executed simultaneously in parallel. The main display control means 250 can variably display the first special symbol 51 even when the second special symbol 52 is varying, and the second special symbol 52 can be displayed even when the first special symbol 51 is varying. Variable display is possible. The second variation pattern determination means 232, in the high probability high base state 624, when the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.), the second special symbol 52 reach-less deviation variation A variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so that the time is relatively long. For example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The second special symbol 52 reach-free deviation fluctuation time is the second special when the number of first reservations is 0 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the symbol 52, or the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 regardless of the number of first reservations. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 . Also, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52. Also by these, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of digestion of the second suspension becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 is the second special symbol when the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the reach-less deviation variation time of 52 becomes relatively short. For example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The second special symbol 52 reach-free deviation fluctuation time is the second special when the number of first reservations is 0 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be shorter than the reach-free deviation variation time of the symbol 52, or the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 regardless of the number of first reservations. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is shorter than the reach-less deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51, and for example, the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is large The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the non-reach variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shortened. In this way, the more the ball is hit toward the first start hole 11, the faster the speed of the second suspension is completed.

Further, for example, the main display control means 250 may be designed to preferentially execute the second game so that the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. That is, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is to be variably displayed, the main display control means 250 causes the other variably displayed to stand by, while the second special symbol 52 is at the timing of starting to variate. In this case, even if the lottery value is reserved as the first reservation, the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is preferentially executed. The second variation pattern determining means 232 determines that when the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is one or more (or two or more, three or more, etc.), the deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 A variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is determined so as to be relatively long. For example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The second special symbol 52 reach-free deviation fluctuation time is the second special when the number of first reservations is 0 The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so as to be longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the symbol 52, or the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 regardless of the number of first reservations. The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that is longer than the reach-free deviation variation time of the first special symbol 51 . Also, for example, the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined such that the greater the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624, the longer the non-reach deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52. Also by these, the more the ball is hit aiming at the first starting port 11, the slower the speed of digestion of the second suspension becomes, so it becomes easier to suppress aiming at the first starting port 11 itself. As a further modification, the second variation pattern determining means 232 is the second special symbol when the number of first reservations in the high probability high base state 624 is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) The variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 may be determined so that the deviation variation time of 52 is relatively short, for example, the number of first reservations is 1 or more (or 2 or more, 3 or more, etc.) ), the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 is changed so that the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-free deviation variation time of the second special symbol 52 when the number of the first reservations is 0. Alternatively, regardless of the number of first reservations, the second special symbol 52 is so that the reach-free deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 is shorter than the reach-zero deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51. Also, for example, in the high probability high base state 624, the larger the number of first reservations, the shorter the reach-less deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol 52 of the second special symbol 52 A variation pattern may be determined. In this way, the speed at which the second suspension is completed increases as the ball is hit toward the first start opening 11, so the speed at which the second suspension is completed can be adjusted according to the player's hitting style.

<Third embodiment> Left-handed strike warning in small hit rush Since the basic configuration of the third embodiment is common to the first and second embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the description of the common points is omitted. The following description will focus on the points of difference.

In a high-probability low base state, a high-probability high-base state, a low-probability high-base state, etc. in which a small hit rush is executed, the player hits the ball to the right, aiming to enter the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加. On the other hand, even in the low-probability low-base state in which the small hit rush, the high-probability high-base state, and the low-probability high-base state are not executed, if the ball is hit to the right and entered into the second starting hole 12, the high-probability low-base state or the low-probability low base state will occur. Loss fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the high-probability high-base state and deviation fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the case of left-handed (low-probability low-base state) deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol with extremely long fluctuation time A pattern is selected, and the game efficiency is lowered more than necessary. In order to avoid such a disadvantageous situation for the player, a visual or audible warning is issued to the player to prompt the player to hit the left hand aiming at the first starting hole 11.例文帳に追加In addition, after recognizing that left-handed hitting is strongly recommended, the player takes the risk of lowering the game efficiency and hits right-handedly with the aim of generating a small hit by entering the ball into the second start hole 12. - 特許庁Considering the disadvantage of the game store due to such a hitting method, if a ball enters the second start hole 12, a strong warning to encourage left-handed hitting (hereinafter referred to as "left-handed hitting Also called a "warning", it is a guidance display that is displayed when it is detected that the player is playing right-handed despite the fact that the player should be playing left-handed, and strongly urges the player to return to playing left-handed. guidance display). Note that the left-handed warning is a high base state (when simply referred to as a "high base state" in this way, it is at least either a "low probability high base state" or a "high probability high base state") or The degree of emphasis of the notification to the player is higher than that of the right-handed guidance that is displayed in a situation where right-handed hitting is recommended, such as a small hit rush, and the level of emphasis is close to a warning of fraud or error. may It should be noted that, instead of the second starting opening 12, it may be configured such that the left-hand hitting warning is issued when the ball passes through the operation opening arranged on the right side of the board surface.

In a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state, a predetermined output means outputs a warning prompting the player to hit a ball aimed at the first start hole 11 for at least a predetermined time when the ball enters the second start hole 12. do. The predetermined output means here is, for example, the flashing of the decoration lamp 111 or the output of a loud warning sound from the speaker 108, which may be controlled by the sub CPU 310 or the effect control means 304, or may be connected to the game store computer. The external information output terminal 160 may be controlled by the main CPU 290 . The predetermined time, which is the warning output period, may vary depending on the type of output means. For example, the flashing period of the decoration lamp 111 may be set to 30 seconds, and the warning sound output period may be set to 10 seconds. If a ball is hit again into the second starting port 12 while such a warning is being output, the timer for measuring the output period of the warning being output is reset, and the warning output for a predetermined period of time is restarted. As described above, it is possible to issue a warning regarding the appropriate sorting according to the game state and the shooting situation of the game ball. can. A state in which such a left-handed warning is executed is referred to as a normal output state.

When the second hold reaches the upper limit during the output of the left-handed warning, the left-handed warning is switched from the output normal state to the output restricted state. This is because in the state where the second hold is full, even if the ball is entered into the second starting port 12, the chances of judging whether the ball is right or wrong do not increase, and there is no advantage in continuing right-handed hitting, so it is thought that the player will stop right-handed hitting. be. Also, even if the second hold is full and the player continues to hit to the right, the number of chances of winning or failing the game will not increase, so there is little disadvantage for the game parlor. The output restriction state referred to here may be, for example, a stop of the left-handed driving warning, or a process of lowering the left-handed driving warning level such as the emission intensity of the decoration lamp 111 or the volume of the warning sound from a strong level to a weak level. (For example, the light emission intensity may be weakened from that in the normal output state, or the volume of the warning sound may be reduced from that in the normal output state). It should be noted that, in the state of output restriction, when a ball entering the second starting port 12 is detected again in a state in which part of the second hold is digested and becomes less than the upper limit, the output restriction state is immediately canceled and left Hit warning resumes.

When a ball is entered into the first starting port 11 while the left-handed warning is output, the left-handed warning is terminated by considering that the right-handed hitting is stopped and the left-handed hitting is started. In addition, when the game state changes to a state in which the ball should be entered into the second starting port 12 while the left-handed warning is output, that is, when the state shifts to a high-base state or a small-hit rush (high-probability low-base state), Also when shifting to a special game, the left-handed warning is forcibly terminated.

Until a predetermined period elapses after the situation changes from the situation in which the ball should be hit to the right, that is, the situation in which the ball should be entered in the second starting hole 12, to the situation in which the ball should be hit to the left, that is, the situation in which the ball should be entered into the first starting hole 11. limits the output of a left-handed warning even in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state. The change to the situation that should be left-handed is, for example, the end of the high base state (when the high probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of pattern fluctuations ends and shifts to the low probability low base state, or when the pattern fluctuation When the low probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of times ends and shifts to the low probability low base state), or the end of the probability fluctuation state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of pattern fluctuations. is the end of Even if the situation changes to left-handed due to the end of such a high base state or the end of the small hit rush, even if the player delays switching to left-handed immediately after the end of the right-handed situation, it will take a while. is intended to allow this. The restriction on the output of the left-handed hitting warning may be, for example, lowering the strength level of the warning or not outputting the left-handed hitting warning itself. The predetermined period for limiting the output of the left-handed warning may be until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses from the end of the high-base state or the small-hit rush, or from the end of the high-base state or the small-hit rush. It may be until there is a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) symbol variation display or the ball enters the second starting port 12 . In addition, even immediately after the end of the high base state or the small winning rush, while the second reservation is full, it may be considered that the disadvantage is small even if the right hit is made, and the output of the left hit warning may be restricted. . Furthermore, the output of the left-handed warning may be restricted even during execution of the special game.

In addition, even while the output of the left-handed warning is restricted, left-handed guidance for guiding the player to hit the ball aimed at the first start hole 11 (situation changes from right-handed to left-handed) It is a guide display that is displayed when the player hits the left hand, and the display of the guide display that urges the player to return to left-handed hitting is not limited. For example, immediately after changing from a right-handed situation to a left-handed situation (for example, the end of the high-base state, the high-probability high-base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations ends, and the low-probability low base state, or when the low probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of pattern fluctuations ends and moves to the low probability low base state, etc.), the degree of emphasis as described above Although the output of the strong left-handed warning is restricted, the guidance display for prompting the player to hit left-handed on the screen of the effect display device 60 or a dedicated decorative lamp is displayed without restriction.

If a predetermined number or more of balls enter the second starting port 12 while the output of left-handed warning is restricted, the restriction is released. The predetermined number referred to here exceeds the number that can be entered if the player continues to hit right by inertia immediately after the end of the situation in which he should hit to the right, so it can be assumed that he intentionally continues to hit to the right. number, for example 10 balls.

As a modification, in a high base state or a high probability low base state (small hit rush), the player is aimed at the second start hole 12 for at least a predetermined period of time triggered by the ball entering the first start hole 11. A right-handed strike warning may be output to prompt the player to hit the ball. During the output of the right-handed warning, if there is a ball entering the second starting port 12 or if the situation changes to the first starting port 11 (the period is limited by the upper limit of the number of symbol fluctuations) When the high probability high base state ends and shifts to the low probability low base state, or when the low probability high base state whose period is limited by the upper limit of the number of pattern fluctuations ends and shifts to the low probability low base state) ends the right-handed warning in the output.

FIG. 36 is a time chart showing the relationship between the change in game state and the timing of the left-handed warning. This figure illustrates the timing relationship between (a) game state, (b) left-hand hitting, (c) right-hand hitting, (d) warning light emission, and (e) warning sound. In (a), period 650 is a small hit rush (high probability low base state) or high base state, and period 652 is a low probability low base state. In the period 650, even if a right-handed ball entering the second starting hole 12 is detected at the timing of S940 of (c), the left-handed warnings of (d) and (e) are not output. When the period 650 ends in S942 and switches to the period 652 of the low-probability low base state, the output of the left-handed warning is restricted for 20 seconds immediately after, and even if the right-handed is detected in S944 during that period, the left-handed warning is not issued. No output. When the restriction on the left-handed hitting warning is lifted at the timing of S946 20 seconds after S942, when the right-handed hitting is detected at the timing of S948, the left-handed hitting warning starts emitting light as shown in (d), and (e ), a left-handed warning sound starts to be output. The warning sound of (e) ends at S950 10 seconds after the start, but the warning light of (d) continues for 30 seconds, and if a right-handed stroke is detected again in S952 during that time, the period of the warning light is measured. The timer is reset and the light emission for 30 seconds is started again, and the output of the warning sound is also restarted. The warning sound of (e) ends in S954 10 seconds after the start, and the warning light emission of (d) ends in S956 30 seconds after the reset. After that, when right-handed hitting is detected again in S958, the left-handed hitting warnings of (d) and (e) are resumed, but when right-handed hitting of (b) is detected, left-handed hitting of (d) and (e) is resumed. Warnings are terminated. As a modification, when a right-handed strike is detected again in S958, the left-handed strike warnings of (d) and (e) are resumed, and even if a right-handed strike of (b) is detected, (d) and (e) are resumed. The left-handed warning may be configured to continue until a specified time.

<Fourth embodiment> The relationship between the type of special game and the small hit rush The basic configuration of the fourth embodiment is common to the first to third embodiments, so the description of the common points is omitted, and the first to third embodiments The description will focus on the differences from the example.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the basic game in the embodiment, the payout balls are obtained by consecutively winning 10R high probability variable jackpots or 4R high probability variable jackpots in succession with relatively large profit given during execution of the special game. It is a game. On the other hand, even if a 2R jackpot with a relatively small profit given during the execution of the special game occurs in the process of consecutive chances, if the jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the special game is executed. In addition to the profit to be given, a derivative game is provided in which the profit to be given during the execution of the small winning rush is generated. As a result, for example, a small win rush occurs only from a situation such as a defeat in a performance such as a battle performance that arouses whether or not a big win with a relatively large profit will occur during the execution of a special game. It is possible to realize a novel game property of obtaining. In addition, it is more profitable to combine the profit of the 2R variable variable jackpot and the profit of the small win rush than to generate a jackpot with a relatively large profit given during the execution of the special game such as the 10R variable variable jackpot and the 4R variable variable jackpot. It is also possible to realize a novel game property that the player can win, and it is possible to draw attention to even a big win with a relatively small big win profit. That is, when simply comparing only the expected value of the number of prize balls acquired during the special game, the expected value of the 10R and 4R variable big hits is larger than that of the 2R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 10R and 4R and 2R Hits. The number of prize balls won in the small hit rush is calculated from the difference in the expected value of the number of prize balls won from Since the expected value of the number of game balls acquired by the game) is larger, the total profit of the 2R probability variable jackpot and the profit of the small hit rush is larger than the profit of the 10R probability variable jackpot and the 4R probability variable jackpot. In addition, since a relatively large profit is given to the player with a small hit rush in the high probability low base state, it is not necessary to give a specification that gives more profit than necessary in the high base state, so the ball output rate is within a suitable range It can be designed to be easily accommodated.

First, in the high-probability high-base state, the result of the hit/fail determination in the second special symbol 52 (corresponding to the second starting port 12 where the player aims to enter the ball in the high-probability high-base state), which is the subject of the game, is a big hit. As the type of special game to be executed in this case, the first special game in which the profit given during execution of the special game is relatively large, and the profit given during execution of the special game is relatively small There is a second special game. The first special game referred to here is, for example, the 10R probability variable jackpot and the 4R probability variable jackpot, and the second special game is, for example, the 2R probability variable jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot. After the end of the first special game, a high probability high base state 624 is reached. On the other hand, the high probability low base state 626 or the low probability high base state 622 is reached after the end of the second special game. Specifically, a high-probability low base state 626 is entered in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a low-probability high base state 622 is entered in the case of a 2R normal jackpot.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the relationship between the type of special game, the transition destination effect, and the game state. In the high-probability high-base state 624 or the high-probability low-base state 626, when the result of the winning/failure determination corresponds to a big hit, "Battle Start!" A battle presentation is executed in which a friend character and an enemy character fight so as to arouse whether or not it is a special game (big hit) with relatively large profit. When the type of the special game is the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 4R probability variable jackpot, a ``win'' scene is displayed as a result of the battle performance, indicating that the result is advantageous to the player. The probability that the type of special game is the 10R variable jackpot is about 35%. The High Probability Base state 624 is transitioned to. The probability that the type of the special game is the 4R probability variable jackpot is about 30%, and in that case, like the second bonus screen 672, "BONUS!!" Transition to high base state 624 . Combined, the battle production is "victory" with a probability of about 65%.

When the type of special game is the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, as a result of the battle performance, a "defeat" scene is displayed to indicate that the result is disadvantageous to the player. However, whether or not to give a chance to reverse the "defeat", that is, whether or not the 2R jackpot accompanies a probability change, or whether the transition to either the high-probability low base state 626 or the low-probability high base state 622 is accompanied. A branching performance, which is a performance to incite a 2R big hit, is executed as a start performance of a special game for a 2R big win. In the branch effect, after displaying "Challenge start!" as in the branch effect screen 673, a button image and "Press the button!" prompt. The probability of progressing from the battle presentation to the branch presentation, that is, the probability of being "defeated" in the battle presentation is about 35%. Of the 35%, there is a probability of 15% that the 2R variable variable jackpot is achieved and the branch performance is "success", and there is a probability of 20% that the 2R normal jackpot is achieved and the branch performance is "failed". When the branch effect is "successful", "success!!" If the branch effect is "failure", "failure!!" This branch effect may be executed before execution of the 2R special game, that is, during variation, or may be executed during the start demonstration of the 2R special game.

In the high-probability high-base state 624, the payout rate is designed to be 1, while in the high-probability low-base state 626, a small hit rush occurs. The state 626 can be said to be a game state more advantageous to the player. In addition, the expected value of the total number of prize balls obtained by combining the number of prize balls in the special game of the 2R probability variable big hit and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small hit rush is the number of prize balls in the special game of the 10R big hit and the 4R big hit. It is greater than the expected value of the total number of prize balls that can be obtained in the high base state 624 . That is, when simply comparing only the expected value of the number of prize balls acquired during the special game, the expected value of the 10R and 4R variable big hits is larger than that of the 2R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R and 2R and 10R and 4R as the same. The number of prize balls won in the small hit rush from the difference in the expected value of the number of prize balls won Since the expected value of the number of game balls that can be acquired by the game) is larger, the total of the profit of the 2R probability variable jackpot and the profit of the small hit rush is the profit of the 10R probability variable jackpot and the 4R probability variable jackpot and the high probability high base state 624. greater than the sum of the profits of Therefore, when the profit after the special game is also taken into consideration, the 2R that shifts to the low probability high base state 622 after the special game ends from the 10R probability variable big hit and the 4R probability variable big hit that shifts to the high probability high base state 624 after the special game ends. It can be said that the probability variable jackpot is more advantageous to the player.

<Fifth Embodiment> Alternate Designs and Simple Designs Since the basic configuration of the fifth embodiment is common to the first to fourth embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the first to fourth embodiments. will be mainly explained.

FIG. 38 shows the arrangement of decorative designs, alternative designs and simple designs. (a) shows the basic arrangement relationship between the main decorative pattern 600, the alternative pattern 601 and the simple pattern 602, (b) shows the display mode in the low probability low base state, and (c) shows the high probability high base state. and high-probability low-base state.

In FIG. 38(a), the three main decorative patterns 600 are decorative patterns corresponding to the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52, and the three patterns are variably displayed using a large area near the center of the screen. be done. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment is a parallel specification in which the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 can be varied in parallel at the same time. It does not correspond to both special patterns 52 at the same time, but corresponds to one of the special patterns according to the game state. For example, a decoration corresponding to the first special symbol 51 in the first game mainly for the variable display of the first special symbol 51 by hitting the left hand aiming at the first starting port 11 like the low probability low base state. A main decorative pattern 600 is variably displayed as a pattern. On the other hand, in the second game mainly for the variable display of the second special symbol 52 by hitting rightward aiming at the second starting port 12 like the high probability high base state and the high probability low base state, the second special symbol A main decorative pattern 600 is variably displayed as a decorative pattern corresponding to 52 .

As shown in FIG. 38(a), alternate patterns 601 and simple patterns 602 are variably displayed in a small area smaller than the display area of the main decorative pattern 600 and provided at the corner of the screen. The alternative pattern 601 is a pattern that is displayed complementarily in addition to the display of the main decorative pattern 600, thereby guaranteeing that the decorative pattern is always displayed at some point within the screen of the effect display device 60. . For example, even if the main decorative pattern is hidden during the execution of the battle effect, the alternative pattern 601 continues to be displayed (and is displayed in front of the battle effect). Display of decorative patterns is guaranteed. The alternative design 601 includes an alternative design 601 a corresponding to the first special design 51 and an alternative design 601 b corresponding to the second special design 52 . The alternative pattern 601 consists of a set of three small patterns corresponding to the main decorative pattern 600 composed of three patterns, and two sets of patterns corresponding to the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. It is, so to speak, a mini decorative pattern. As the main decorative pattern 600 shows a big hit when all three of the same patterns such as "444" and "777" are aligned, the alternative patterns 601 are also the same of three such as "444" and "777". A big hit is indicated when the symbols are aligned and stopped, and a loss is indicated when the symbols are stopped in a manner that the same symbols are not aligned.

The simple design 602 is a design for indicating whether or not at least one of the first special design 51 and the second special design 52 is being displayed in a variable manner, and for indicating the result of the winning/failing determination. The simple design 602 includes a simple design 602a corresponding to the first special design 51 and a simple design 602b corresponding to the second special design 52, which are variably displayed near the alternative designs 601a and 601b, respectively. The simple design 602 further includes a simple design 602c corresponding to the first special design 51 and a simple design 602d corresponding to the second special design 52, which are variably displayed at positions apart from the alternative designs 601a and 601b. be. By displaying the simple symbols 602 at a plurality of separate locations, it is possible to ensure the display of which one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed in a variable manner. In other words, for this alternative pattern, for example, even if the main decorative pattern is hidden during the execution of a battle effect, etc., a variable display that alternately switches between "○" and "X" to be described later is displayed. By continuing (and being displayed in front of the battle production), the display of which one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being variably displayed is secured. The simple design 602 is a design that indicates the result of the success/failure determination for the first special design 51 or the second special design 52 with a simple symbol or figure such as "o" or "x". The simple symbol 602 indicates a big win when stopped at "o", and indicates a loss when stopped at "x". In FIG. 38(a), for the sake of convenience, both the alternative symbol 601a and the alternative symbol 601b are stopped in a state indicating a big win, but only one of them stops in a state indicating a big win, and the other indicates a loss. It is preferred to stop in a manner. Similarly, in FIG. 38(a), for the sake of convenience, both the simple symbols 602a and 602b are stopped in a state indicating a big win, but only one of them stops in a state indicating a big win, and the other indicates a loss. Further, both the simple pattern 602c and the simple pattern 602d are stopped in a mode indicating a big win, but only one of them stops in a mode indicating a big win, and the other one stops in a mode indicating a loss. It is preferable to stop in the manner shown.

In the low-probability low-base state of FIG. 38(b), the main decorative pattern 600a corresponding to the first special pattern 51 is variably displayed near the center of the screen, and the alternative pattern corresponds to the main decorative pattern 600a. 601a is also variably displayed. The simple symbols 602 a and 602 c are also variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol 51 . At this time, the main decorative pattern 600b corresponding to the second special pattern 52 is not displayed, and when the second special pattern 52 is variably displayed, the simple patterns 602b, 602d and the alternative pattern 601b corresponding to the second special pattern 52 are displayed. Fluctuating display. The simple symbols 602b, 602d and the alternative symbol 601b during the stop of fluctuation are displayed in a manner indicating the deviation.

In the low-probability high-base state, high-probability high-base state, and high-probability low-base state shown in FIG. The alternative pattern 601b is also variably displayed in a manner corresponding to the main decorative pattern 600b. Simple symbols 602b and 602d are also variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol 52. FIG. At this time, the main decorative pattern 600a corresponding to the first special pattern 51 is not displayed, and when the first special pattern 51 is variably displayed, the simple patterns 602a, 602c and the alternative pattern 601a corresponding to the first special pattern 51 are displayed. Fluctuating display. The simple symbols 602a, 602c and the alternative symbol 601a during the suspension of fluctuation are displayed in a manner indicating the deviation.

Here, in the high base state after the end of the special game related to the first special symbol 51 that occurred in the first hit, that is, the big hit in the low probability low base state, at least the fluctuation is stopped immediately after shifting to the high base state. When the simple symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in the stopped state corresponding to the first special symbol 51, they are displayed in the stop symbol mode of "x" indicating the disconnection (see FIG. 38(c)). Since the first special symbol 51 immediately after the transition to the high base state is in a state of being a big hit symbol and stopped unless the first lottery value is reserved or the ball is entered into the first starting port 11, it is originally a simple symbol. 602a and 602c should also remain stopped at "O" indicating a big hit. However, after a long period of time without the first special symbol 51 being changed, when it returns to the low-probability low-base state again (for example, in the low-probability low-base state, the first winning lottery value is not reserved) The first special pattern 51 is stopped at the big win pattern and the special game is executed, and even in the low probability high base state after that, the first win/fail lottery value is not held, and the second special pattern 52 is variably displayed 50 times. When the low-probability high-base state ends and shifts to the low-probability low-base state by doing so), when the simple patterns 602a and 602c start to fluctuate from "○", from the previous big hit of the first special pattern 51 Since a long time has already passed, it is difficult to understand which jackpot the "○" indicates, and the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the simple symbols 602a and 602c are forcibly displayed as "x" when the game shifts from the initial hit to the high base state. The confusion of the player is avoided by starting the initial pattern fluctuation of the simple patterns 602a and 602c (normally occurring after returning to the low-probability low-base state again) from "x" indicating the deviation. do.

In addition, after returning from the high base state or the high probability low base state to the low probability low base state, that is, after a long period of time has passed without the first special symbol 51 as described above being changed, it returns to the low probability low base state again. When returning (for example, in the low probability low base state, the first special symbol 51 is stopped at the big hit symbol in the state where there is no reservation of the first winning lottery value, the special game is executed, and then the low probability high base shifted Even in the state, the first winning lottery value is not held, and the second special symbol 52 is displayed 50 times to end the low-probability high-base state and shift to the low-probability low-base state). The fluctuation display of the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601a corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the special pattern 51 starts to fluctuate, for example, from an irregularly out of alignment state such as "357". Usually, a long time has passed since the big hit of the first special pattern 51 last time, and for example, it starts from a big win mode with probability variation such as "777" corresponding to the big hit of the first special pattern 51 last time. This is because there is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the last big win is accompanied by probability variation. Alternatively, even if it starts from a big hit mode without probability change such as "444" corresponding to the big hit of the second special pattern 52 immediately before, the player can say that the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern 52 has started to fluctuate. This is because there is a risk of misunderstanding.

In addition, even if the big hit of the first special symbol 51 occurs accidentally in a game state other than the low-probability low-base state, the first special symbol 51 during fluctuation stop in the high-base state after the end of the special game. Correspondingly, when the simple symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in the stopped state, the simple symbols 602a and 602c are displayed in the stop symbol mode of "x" indicating the disengagement (see FIG. 38(c)).

Further, in the case of shifting from a high base state or a high probability low base state to a low probability low base state, at least immediately after shifting to the low probability low base state, a simple pattern 602b corresponding to the second special pattern 52 during fluctuation stop. , 602d are displayed in the stopped state, they are displayed in the form of a stop symbol of "x" indicating the disengagement (see FIG. 38(b)). When the second special pattern 52 at the time of transition to the low-probability low-base state is a jackpot pattern, the state of stopping with the jackpot pattern unless the second win/fail lottery value is reserved or a ball is entered into the second start port 12.例文帳に追加Therefore, originally, the simple symbols 602b and 602d should also remain stopped at "o" indicating a big hit. However, after that, when a long period of time has passed without the second special symbol 52 being changed and it shifts again to the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state (for example, in the low probability high base state, the second winning lottery value A second special pattern 52 is stopped in a jackpot pattern in a state of no reservation, a special game is executed, and even in a low-probability high base state after that, the second winning/failure lottery value is not reserved and the first special symbol is not generated. The low-probability high-base state is terminated by the display of 51 fluctuating 50 times, and the state is shifted to the low-probability low-base state. is stopped in the big hit pattern, the special game is executed, and then the state shifts to the low probability height base state), when the simple patterns 602b and 602d start to fluctuate from "○", the second special pattern 52 Since a long time has already passed since the previous big win, it is difficult to understand which big win the "○" indicates, which may give the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, the simple symbols 602b and 602d are forcibly displayed as "x" when the high base state or the high probability low base state is shifted to the low probability low base state. By starting the first symbol variation of the simple symbols 602b and 602d (usually after moving to the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state again) from the “x” indicating the deviation, To avoid player confusion.

In addition, after the low-probability low-base state again transitions to the low-probability high-base state or the high-probability high-base state, that is, after a long period of time has passed without the second special symbol 52 being changed, the low-probability high-base state or the high-probability state again. When the state is shifted to the high-probability base state (for example, in the low-probability high-base state, the second special symbol 52 is stopped at the jackpot symbol and the special game is executed in a state where the second win/fail lottery value is not reserved, and then the transition is made. Even in the low-probability high-base state, the second win-or-fail lottery value is not held, and the low-probability high-base state is terminated by changing and displaying the first special pattern 51 50 times, and the state is shifted to the low-probability low-base state. , When the first special symbol 51 is stopped at the big hit symbol in the low probability low base state without the second winning lottery value being held, the special game is executed, and then it shifts to the low probability high base state) first time The fluctuation display of the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601b corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the second special pattern 52 starts to fluctuate, for example, from an irregularly out of alignment state such as "357". Usually, a long time has passed since the big hit of the second special pattern 52 last time, and starting from a big win mode without probability variation such as "444" corresponding to the big hit of the second special pattern 52 last time. This is because there is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the previous big hit does not involve a change in probability. Alternatively, even if the game starts from a jackpot mode with probability variation such as "777" corresponding to the big hit of the first special pattern 51 immediately before, the player is notified that the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern 51 has started to fluctuate. This is because there is a risk of misunderstanding.

On the other hand, when a big hit with probability variation occurs from a high base state or a high probability low base state, and after the special game ends, the high base state or the high probability low base state occurs again, the next initial second special symbol 52 The main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601b corresponding to the symbol variation may start to fluctuate from the big hit mode of the immediately preceding main decorative symbol 600 and the alternative symbol 601b such as "777".

In the low-probability low-base state of FIG. 38(b), the simple symbols 602b and 602d corresponding to the second special symbol 52, which is not the subject of the game, are always displayed on the screen as long as a certain degree of visibility is ensured. There is a view that there is little need to let Therefore, the simple design 602b and the simple design 602d corresponding to the second special design 52 are hidden after a predetermined first time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special design 52, and the predetermined timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special design 52. 2nd time before, the non-display of the simple symbols 602b and 602d is canceled and displayed. For example, the simple design 602b and the simple design 602d are hidden after one second from the start of the fluctuation of the second special design 52, and the simple design 602b and the simple design 602d are displayed one second before the scheduled timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special design 52. state.

However, for the first pattern variation after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 100, there is a possibility that the effect control means 304 cannot recognize the variation start timing and variation stop timing, so 1 second from the first variation start after power-on Even if it passes, the simple design 602b and the simple design 602d are not hidden. Also, immediately after the transition from the high-probability high-base state or the high-probability low-base state to the low-probability low-base state, there is a high possibility that the retention of the first win-fail lottery value is zero, but the second win-fail lottery value is likely to be zero. Since there is a high possibility that the hold is 1 or more, there is a high possibility that the first symbol variation immediately after the transition to the low probability low base state is not the first special symbol 51 but the second special symbol 52. - 特許庁If the simple pattern 602b and the simple pattern 602d are hidden in such a situation, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 is being displayed in a variable manner. Even after 1 second from the first symbol variation immediately after the transition to the state, the simple symbol 602b and the simple symbol 602d are not hidden (simple symbol b and The simple pattern 602d is not hidden, or during the first pattern fluctuation immediately after the transition to the low probability low base state, the simple pattern b and the simple pattern 602d are displayed until 10 seconds, which is one second or more, elapses from the start of the fluctuation. not hidden).

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restarted due to some trouble or operation during the pattern fluctuation (when the power is restored after being turned off), the main decorative pattern 600 is resumed in the high-speed fluctuation state. This is because there is a high possibility that the effect control means 304 cannot recognize which of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 should be displayed as the main decorative symbol 600 immediately after the power is turned on. Also, if the main decorative pattern 600 is restarted in the state where the fluctuation is stopped, if the fluctuation time is a long fluctuation pattern of 3 minutes or more, nothing will be displayed for a long period of time, which is not preferable as a return screen. . In addition, the high-speed fluctuation state is always displayed at a constant speed (high speed), and the speed is not reduced until the timing of the fluctuation stop. Switch to the stopped state.

<Sixth embodiment>
Since the basic configuration of the sixth embodiment is common to the first to fifth embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the first to fifth embodiments, particularly the fifth embodiment, which has a strong relationship The explanation will focus on the differences between the two.

In this embodiment, a movable logo accessory that operates in front of the screen is provided along the screen of the effect display device 60 so as to cover at least a portion of the screen and overlap. In addition, a light guide plate, which is a plate-like performance accessory having transparency and light emitting function and having an area equivalent to that of the screen of the performance display device 60, is superimposed so as to cover the entire screen of the performance display device 60. - 特許庁These are activated or illuminated as part of the presentation. Here, the display priority of the simple pattern 602 is set higher than other effects displays, such as the advance notice effect, the background effect, and the variable effect of the main decorative pattern 600). Therefore, the following adjustments are made so as to reduce the possibility that the operation of the logo movable accessory and the light emission of the light guide plate interfere with the display of the simple pattern 602, so as not to interfere with the display of the result of the pass/fail judgment by the simple pattern 602. .

FIG. 39 shows the arrangement of the logo movable accessory and the light guide plate. (a) illustrates the arrangement and operating position of the movable logo accessory 680, and (b) illustrates the arrangement of the light guide plate pattern 681. FIG. The movable logo accessory 680 is a decorative movable accessory in which a logo such as the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a subject matter that serves as a motif, or a character name is modeled, and is formed of a member such as transparent acrylic. A light-emitting member such as an LED is built in a movable object. In a normal state, the logo movable accessory 680 is in a stationary state at an initial position where it does not cover the screen above the effect display device 60 at all, or at least only slightly (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 39(a)). Drawn logo moveable accessory 680). In this resting state, not only the main decorative pattern 600 but also all of the substitute pattern 601 and the simple pattern 602 are easily recognizable by the player.

The logo movable accessory 680 operates under the control of the effect control means 304 according to the effect pattern. For example, the logo movable accessory 680 descends while emitting light at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect, that is, slides downward, and has a role of informing the player that the expectation of a big hit is high. When the downward motion of the movable logo accessory 680 is completed, it will be in a stationary state for a predetermined time at the motion completion position that covers the substantially central area of the screen of the effect display device 60 (the movable logo drawn with a dashed line in FIG. 39(a)). role 680). When the movable logo accessory 680 has completed its operation, the movable logo accessory 680 or the support mechanism for supporting the movable logo accessory 680 from the left and right is positioned so that it can overlap the simple symbols 602c and 602d, and these symbols can be removed from the player. It can be difficult to see.

In the low-probability low-base state, if the ball accidentally enters the second starting port 12, or if the second hold stored before the transition to the low-probability low-base state remains after the transition, etc. The 2 special symbols 52 can be variably displayed, but since the second game is not the main game in the low-probability low-base state, the variation time of the 2nd special symbols 52 is set to a very long time (for example, 10 minutes). there is something In the low-probability low-base state, the main decorative pattern 600 is variably displayed as a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern 51, and does not correspond to the second special pattern 52. Therefore, a simple pattern 602b is displayed as a pattern corresponding to the second special pattern 52. , 602d. However, in particular, the visibility of the simple pattern 602d may be interfered with by the operation completion state of the movable logo accessory 680, and the player does not know when the fluctuation will stop during the extremely long fluctuation time. Therefore, it may be difficult for the player to clearly display the fluctuation stop.

Therefore, when the second special symbol 52 starts to fluctuate in the low probability low base state, from the timing before the predetermined first time from the scheduled fluctuation stop timing (timing at which the fluctuation stop state starts) of the second special symbol 52 , restricts the movement of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the first special symbol 51 for a predetermined second time longer than the first time. The first time is for example 5 seconds and the second time is for example 7.5 seconds. The first time is the operation time required for the reciprocating motion of the logo movable accessory 680 (the motion from the initial position to the motion completion position and then returning to the initial position), and the time to ensure that the second special symbol 52 stops fluctuating. It may be a time obtained by adding (a time allowed as an error with respect to the actual fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52). For example, the operation time of the logo movable accessory 680 (time required for reciprocating operation, time required for operation from the initial position to the operation completion position, or time required for operation from the operation completion position to the initial position) may be 4 seconds. And when the fluctuation stop security time of the second special symbol 52 (pre-stop time for recognizing that the simple symbols 602c and 602d are stopped after changing) is 1 second, a total of 5 seconds is the first time becomes. The second time is the first time, the stop time of the second special symbol 52 (the time to actually maintain the stop display, and the time may be different between the case of loss and the case of a small hit). And the time for securing the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 (simple patterns 602c, 602d is the post-stop time for recognizing that the fluctuation starts from the stopped state, and the actual second special symbol 52 The time allowed as an error) may be added to the fluctuation start timing of . For example, the first time is 5 seconds, the stop time of the second special symbol 52 is 1.5 seconds (0.5 seconds if it is out, 1.5 seconds if it is a small hit), the second special The second time is a total of 7.5 seconds (6.5 seconds in the case of loss and 7.5 seconds in the case of a small hit) when the fluctuation start security time of the symbol 52 is 1 second.

As described above, in the low-probability low-base state, it is possible to clearly display to the player the stop and start of the fluctuation of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 so as to be visually recognized. In addition, the operation restriction of the logo movable accessory 680 is only an exceptional control, and it is preferable in terms of design that such control is minimized. No restrictions are placed on extremely infrequent events such as the action of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the display. However, as a modification, before and after the stop timing of the simple design 602 corresponding to the first special design 51, the operation limitation of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the second special design 52 may be similarly provided. Alternatively, the specifications may be such that the logo movable accessory 680 is not operated in response to the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in the low-probability low-base state. On the other hand, in the game states other than the low-probability low-base state, that is, the high-probability high-base state, the high-probability low-base state, and the low-probability high-base state, which are game states in which right-handed hitting is the main subject, the logo movable accessory is for the same reason. 680 operating limits are not provided. However, as a modification, even in the high-probability high-base state, high-probability low-base state, and low-probability high-base state, which are game states in which right-handed hitting is the main subject, the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 Before and after the stop timing, it is possible to provide an operation limitation (the operation limitation described above) of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the first special design 51, or before and after the stop timing of the simple design 602 corresponding to the first special design 51. An operation limitation (the operation limitation described above) of the logo movable accessory 680 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 may be provided. The number of types of effects that can be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 60 is greater when the logo movable accessory 680 is at the operation completion position than when it is at the initial position. For example, when the player is at the initial position, a friend character, an enemy character, and an announcement effect are displayed, whereas when the player is at the action completion position, only the friend character is displayed. Also, the number of light-emitting decorations such as the blinking decorative lamps 111 on the board surface of the game board 80 is greater when the logo movable accessory 680 is at the operation completion position than when it is at the initial position. For example, only one out of ten light-emitting decorations blinks at the initial position, whereas nine out of ten light-emitting decorations blink at the operation completion position. Also, the button effect to prompt the pressing of the effect button 109 is less likely or not generated when the logo movable accessory 680 is at the operation completion position than when it is at the initial position. In addition, when the power is restored from a power failure, the logo movable accessory 680 can perform an initial operation, and the time required for the initial operation is, for example, 10 seconds. Also, a variation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 does not operate within 10 seconds from the start of pattern variation is selected rather than a variation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 can operate within 10 seconds from the start of pattern variation. or there is no variation pattern in which the logo movable accessory 680 can move within 10 seconds from the start of pattern variation.

In FIG. 39B, a light guide plate pattern 681 is a pattern drawn on a light guide plate, which is a transmissive member such as acrylic, superimposed on the front surface of the screen of the effect display device 60 . The light guide plate has a pattern drawn by surface processing, and is a dramatic mechanism in which the pattern is faintly illuminated by the light of the LED illuminated from the side and appears to stand out. The illustrated light guide plate pattern 681a is a pattern representing the face of a friend character (the same character as the friend character in the battle production) which is the motif of the pachinko game machine 100, and the light guide plate patterns 681b and 681c are lightning bolts. It seems that If at least one of these light guide plate patterns 681a to 681c overlaps the simple pattern 602, the visibility of the simple pattern 602 may be reduced.

In the low-probability low-base state, if the ball accidentally enters the second starting port 12, or if the second hold stored before the transition to the low-probability low-base state remains after the transition, etc. The 2 special symbols 52 can be variably displayed, but in the low-probability low-base state, the second game is not the main game, so the variation time of the 2nd special symbols 52 is set to a very long time (for example, 10 minutes). There is something. In the low-probability low-base state, the main decorative pattern 600 is variably displayed as a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern 51, and does not correspond to the second special pattern 52. Therefore, as a pattern corresponding to the second special pattern 52, a simple pattern 602b is displayed. , 602d. However, in particular, the visibility of the simple pattern 602d may be interfered with by the light emission of the light guide plate. It may be difficult to make the fluctuation stop clearly indicated in the

Therefore, the light guide plate corresponding to the first special symbol 51 is displayed over a predetermined fourth time longer than the third time from the timing before the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol 52 by the third predetermined time. Limit light emission. The third time is, for example, 1 second and the fourth time is, for example, 3.5 seconds. The third time is a time for ensuring light emission control of the light guide plate. The reason why the third time is shorter than the first time is that, unlike the movable logo accessory 680, which requires a certain amount of time to operate, light emission control of the light guide plate, which is a non-movable member, is instantaneous (movable logo accessory 680). If it is 680, it takes a long time to operate, but for the light guide plate, it is only necessary to interrupt the light emission, so it will be instantaneous), and the execution just before the stop timing of the second special symbol 52 is sufficient. The fourth time is the third time, the time to secure the stop time of the second special symbol 52 and the start of the variation of the second special symbol 52 (as an error with respect to the variation start timing of the second special symbol 52 allowable time). For example, the third time is 1 second (pre-stop time for recognizing that the simple patterns 602c and 602d stop after fluctuation), and the stop time of the second special pattern 52 is 1.5 seconds (in the case of deviation is 0.5 seconds, and may be 1.5 seconds in the case of a small hit), the fluctuation start collateral time of the second special pattern 52 (simple patterns 602c, 602d are made to recognize that the fluctuation starts from the stopped state This is the time after stopping for the second special symbol 52, and the time allowed as an error with respect to the actual fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol 52) is 1 second, and the total is 3.5 seconds (2.5 seconds in the case of deviation, 3.5 seconds may be used for a small hit) is the fourth time.

As described above, in the low-probability low-base state, it is possible to clearly display to the player the stop and start of the fluctuation of the simple symbol 602 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 so as to be visually recognized. Further, similar light emission restriction may be implemented in game states other than the low probability low base state. However, in game states other than the low-probability low-base state (the above-described game state centered on right-handed hitting), the pattern variation of the first special pattern 51 is extremely infrequent, so the light emission limit of the light guide plate is minimized. Therefore, the light emission limit timing of the light guide plate may be the same timing as the stop timing of the simple pattern 602d corresponding to the second special pattern 52, or the light emission limit time may be shorter than the light emission limit time in the low probability low base state (for example, 2 seconds). As a further modified example, in a game state other than the low-probability low-base state (the above-described game state centered on right-handed hitting), the same light emission restriction may not be performed.

In this embodiment, the operation of the movable logo accessory 680 and the light emission of the light guide plate are restricted in order to ensure the visibility of the simple pattern 602, but in the modified example, the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 The display may be restricted before and after the simple pattern 602 is stopped. Also, as shown in FIG. 39(a), an intermediate sensor 682 for detecting the presence of the movable logo accessory 680 is provided at an intermediate position between the initial position and the operation completion position of the movable logo accessory 680, and the above-described limited execution is performed. The logo movable accessory 680 may be restricted from exceeding the position of the intermediate sensor 682 when the conditions are met. Even if the logo movable accessory 680 descends to the position of the intermediate sensor 682, the visibility of the simple pattern 602 is not hindered, so the operation is allowed halfway. For example, if the logo movable accessory 680 has a three-stage descent effect and a two-stage descent effect, it is possible to set whether or not there is a restriction such that the 3-step descent effect is restricted, but the 2-step descent effect is not limited. be. In another modification, in order to ensure not only the visibility of the simple design 602 but also the alternative design 601, or mainly to ensure the visibility of the alternative design 601, the alternative design 601 stop timing Before and after , the movement of the logo movable accessory 680 and the light emission of the light guide plate may be restricted.

<Seventh embodiment> Pseudo small winning game presentation Since the basic configuration of the seventh embodiment is common to the first to sixth embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the description of the common points is omitted. Differences, especially differences from the fourth embodiment, which is highly relevant, will be mainly described.

As explained in the fourth embodiment, the basic game is a game in which the profit from the big win is relatively large, and the winning balls are obtained by successively winning 10R variable probability big hits or 4R variable probability big wins in succession. On the other hand, even if a 2R jackpot with a relatively small profit from the jackpot occurs in the process of consecutive wins, if the jackpot is a 2R variable variable jackpot, the profit from the small hit rush is generated in addition to the profit from the jackpot. It has a derivative game of making it.

On the other hand, even if it corresponds to the 2R probability variable big hit in which a small winning rush occurs, since the game state to be shifted after that is a variable probability state, if the next big hit occurs in the first one symbol fluctuation. , the player may move to the next game state without experiencing a continuous small winning game by the small winning rush. Therefore, a game is realized in which the same operation as the small winning rush and the same performance as the small winning rush are experienced in advance during the special game related to the 2R probability variable big winning, and the occurrence of the next big winning without experiencing the small winning rush is avoided in advance. .

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the performance timing in the 2R probability variable big hit special game. (a) shows the effect content and the effect timing, and (b) shows the opening timing of the big winning opening. A period 660 is a start performance period in the special game of the 2R probability variable jackpot, a period 661 is the unit game period of the first round, a period 662 is the unit game period of the second round, and a period 663 is the end of the special game. This is the presentation period (end demonstration period).

When the high-probability low base state is scheduled after the end of the special game related to the 2R jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot), the effect executed in the high-probability low base state, that is, the small win rush is the period of the special game related to the 2R jackpot. In addition, a relatively short opening of the big winning opening is executed multiple times per unit game in one or more unit games among multiple unit games included in the special game. That is, during the 2R probability variable big hit special game, the game shifts to the same or similar performance mode as the small winning rush performance mode, and the same or similar performance as the small winning rush is executed. The effect of the small winning rush in the present embodiment is the effect of repeating the display of the ally character defeating the weak enemy characters one after another every time the small winning game is played. The opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening also reproduces the same opening and closing pattern as in the small winning game in the small winning rush. In addition, the effect executed during the special game period is seamlessly continued as a small winning rush effect even in the high-probability low base state after the end of the special game.

To explain along the drawing, in period 660, which is the start demonstration time of the special game, the first pseudo-small hit variation production imitating the pattern fluctuation production in which a small hit occurs is executed (period 700, about 1.4 second), the first pseudo-small-hit start effect imitating the start demonstration effect of the small-hit game is executed (period 701, about 0.1 second). In the simulated small winning start production, a pattern is displayed in which a weak enemy character appears on the screen. Here, the period 660, which is the actual start demonstration time of the special game, ends, and becomes the period 661, which is the first unit game period of the special game. It should be noted that the simulated small hit variation production is the same as the production during fluctuation in the high probability low base state, for example, it is a production in which a friend character is walking while being wary of being attacked by a weak enemy character, but it is a special game. Since it is medium (during the unit game), the decorative pattern is hidden, the alternative pattern is also hidden, and the simple pattern is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit ("○" form). (In the high-probability low-base state, the decorative design is variably displayed, and the alternative design and simple design are also variably displayed). This is the same for the pseudo small hit variation effect described later. In addition, during the performance during the special game other than the simulated small hit variation performance, as described above, the decorative pattern is hidden, the alternative pattern is also hidden, and the simple pattern is displayed. is stop-displayed in the form of a big hit ("○" form). Also, a background effect corresponding to the high-probability low base state is displayed over a period 660-663.

In the period 661, the big winning opening is opened in S1000, and the first pseudo small hit unit game production imitating the unit game production of the small winning game is executed (period 702, about 3 seconds). In the pseudo small winning unit game effect, a pattern of attacking a weak enemy character is displayed each time the ball enters the big winning hole. At S1001, the big winning opening is closed, and the first pseudo-small-hit end effect imitating the end demonstration effect of the small-hit game is executed (period 703, about 0.5 seconds). In the simulated small winning ending presentation, simultaneously with the closing of the big winning opening, a pattern of exploding weak enemy characters that have already been attacked is displayed, and the number of winning balls or winnings is displayed when the first big winning opening is opened. number of balls is displayed. The above period 700 to period 703 is regarded as one pseudo small winning occurrence and small winning game performance, which is repeated up to 6 times during two rounds of the special game.

As the second pseudo-small-hit generation and small-hit game, the second pseudo-small-hit variation performance is first executed (period 704), and the second pseudo-small-hit start performance is executed (period 705). At S1002, the big winning opening is opened, and the second pseudo-small-hit unit game effect is executed (period 706). is executed (period 707).

As the third pseudo-small-hit occurrence and small-hit game, the third pseudo-small-hit variation performance is first executed (period 708), and the third pseudo-small-hit start performance is executed (period 709). At S1004, the big winning opening is opened, and the third pseudo small winning unit game effect is executed (period 710), and the big winning opening is closed at S1005, and the third pseudo small winning ending effect. is executed (period 711).

As the fourth pseudo-small-hit occurrence and small-hit game, the fourth pseudo-small-hit variation performance is first executed (period 712), and the fourth pseudo-small-hit start performance is executed (period 713). Here, the period 661 which is the first round unit game period of the actual special game ends, and the period 662 which is the second unit game period of the special game. At S1006, the big winning opening is opened, and the fourth pseudo small winning unit game effect is executed (period 714), and at S1007 the big winning opening is closed and the fourth pseudo small winning ending effect is produced. is executed (period 715).

As the fifth pseudo-small-hit generation and small-hit game, the fifth pseudo-small-hit variation performance is first executed (period 716), and the fifth pseudo-small-hit start performance is executed (period 717). At S1008, the big winning opening is opened, and the fifth pseudo small winning unit game effect is executed (period 718), the big winning opening is closed at S1009, and the fifth pseudo small winning ending effect is produced. is executed (period 719).

As the 6th pseudo-small-hit generation and small-hit game, the 6th pseudo-small-hit variation performance is first executed (period 720), and the 6th pseudo-small-hit start performance is executed (period 721). At S1010, the big winning opening is opened, and the sixth pseudo small winning unit game effect is executed (period 722), the big winning opening is closed at S1011, and the sixth pseudo small winning ending effect is produced. is executed (period 723). Thereafter, the period 662, which is the unit game period of the second round of the actual special game, ends, and the period 663, which is the end demonstration time of the special game, is reached.

As described above, in one or more unit games among a plurality of unit games included in the special game of the 2R probability variable jackpot, a plurality of short openings are performed during the one unit game, and the effect content is also a small hit. By making the same or similar during the rush, it is possible to make it look like a small win and a small win game that occur a plurality of times in succession similar to the small win rush as a whole. Incidentally, the jackpots other than the 2R probability variable jackpot are released only once during one unit game, and the performance during the special game is different from that of the 2R probability variable jackpot. Specifically, if it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, as described above, the production contents are the same or similar over the final round (2R), the ending demo that shifts after that, and the high probability low base state that shifts after that. For example, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the final round (10R) executes an introduction effect of the ally character, and in the ending demonstration that transitions after that, a production that informs the transition to a high-probability high base state, such as "Probability-variable rush!" is executed, and in the high-probability, high-base state that follows, an effect is executed in which the ally character sprints, and the content of the effect at each timing is configured to be different.

Here, the production and the opening and closing of the big winning hole are executed based on the same production and opening/closing pattern as the small winning rush, but since it is actually a special game with a 2R probability variable big win, the number of times to the big winning hole per round is increased. The number of incoming balls has an upper limit (for example, 10 balls). Therefore, it is possible that the number of balls entering the big winning opening reaches the upper limit while the pseudo small winning game is repeated three times in one round. For example, if 5 balls are entered in the first opening of the first round and 5 balls are entered in the second opening, the second round will be started without waiting for the third opening. In such a case, the occurrence of the third pseudo-small hit and the small-hit game are omitted, and the pseudo small-hit variation performance corresponding to the fourth time in the period 712 immediately before the start timing of the second round (S1006) is used as a reference. After executing the pseudo small winning start effect corresponding to the fourth time in the period 713, the opening of the big winning opening and the pseudo small winning unit game effect corresponding to the fourth time are executed from S1006. The opening time (about 3 seconds) of the big winning opening 20 in the special game of the 2R probability variable jackpot is longer than the opening time (about 1 second) of the big winning opening 20 in the small winning game.

At the timing of S1000 to S1011 shown in FIG. 40(b), the main board 200 sends the sub-board 300 a command to open and close the big winning slot. The effect control means 304 executes effects according to commands from the main board 200 as pseudo small winning game effects, and effects according to commands from the sub CPU 310 (corresponding to the effect determination means 303) of the sub board 300. If you run and including. For example, like the pseudo small winning unit game production, the production executed when the big winning opening is opened is executed based on the opening command of the big winning opening. In addition, the effect executed when closing the big prize opening, such as the simulated small winning end effect and the effect effect of exploding the enemy character, is executed based on the command to close the big prize hole. Other pseudo-small-hit performances, such as pseudo-small-hit start performances, pseudo-small-hit fluctuation performances, pseudo-small-hit end performances, display performances of the number of winning balls displayed during this time, etc., are managed by the sub CPU 310 of the sub board 300. Executed at timing based on commands based on

In addition, if it is planned to be in a low probability low base state after the end of the special game related to the 2R jackpot (2R normal jackpot), a large winning opening relative to each unit game in a plurality of unit games included in the special game perform only one short release. This is not an opening/closing pattern that imitates a small winning game, and an effect that imitates a small winning game effect in a pseudo manner is not executed. In addition, in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, the time (end demonstration time) of the end performance of the special game is relatively shortened, thereby seamlessly integrating the performance during the special game and the performance of the small hit rush. , 2R In the case of a normal jackpot, the end effect time (end demonstration time) of the special game is relatively long, and is not integrated with the small win rush as described above. For example, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, in the final round (2R), an effect is executed in which the ally character falls down, and in the ending demo that transitions after that, an effect is given to inform the transition to a low-probability, high-base state, such as "entering the chance time!" is executed, and in the low-probability high-base state that follows, an effect is executed in which the ally character tries to stand up, and the content of the effect at each timing is configured to be different.

<Eighth embodiment> Special variation effect Since the basic configuration of the eighth embodiment is common to the first to seventh embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the first to seventh embodiments are focused. to explain.

The special variable performance described in this embodiment is one of variable performances, and is a kind of pseudo-continuous variable performance. A so-called pseudo-continuous variation presentation is known, in which a plurality of symbols are displayed as if they were temporarily stopped in one symbol variation, thereby making it appear that the symbol variation has been performed pseudo-multiple times. The special variation performance of this embodiment is one of the performances similar to this pseudo-continuous variation performance, but there are some differences from the normal pseudo-continuous variation performance. In the normal pseudo-continuous variation performance, the symbols are displayed as if they were temporarily stopped to make it look like a plurality of symbol variations. On the other hand, the special variable effect of the present embodiment is a re-variation effect (first notice effect) or a high expectation effect (first 2 notice effect) can be generated. The high-expectation performance is a performance with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the re-variation performance. When the re-variation performance is executed, the re-variation performance or the high-expectation performance can be further generated after the execution of the specific performance for temporarily stopping the performance again at a predetermined timing after the re-execution of the variation performance. As a result, it appears as if a plurality of pseudo pattern variations have been executed. The special variation performance includes a first special variation performance and a second special variation performance, which are classified according to the difference in the specific performance.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect process of the first special variation effect. When the production is started from the fluctuation start 730, the specific production can be executed at any timing of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, 10 seconds, 14 seconds, and 18 seconds. That is, a specific effect 731 that pauses after 2 seconds, a specific effect 732 that pauses after 6 seconds, a specific effect 733 that pauses after 10 seconds, a specific effect 734 that pauses after 14 seconds, and a specific effect that pauses after 18 seconds. There are 5 ways of 735. Specific renderings 731 to 735 are, for example, renderings in which playback of the entire video displayed on the screen is paused and the colors of the entire screen are reversed. As a pattern in which none of the specific effects 731 to 735 is executed, if the fluctuation stops 745 after 2 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, if the fluctuation stops 746 after 6 seconds, if the fluctuation stops 747 after 10 seconds, and after 14 seconds If it comes to stop 748, it may come to variable stop 749 after 18 seconds.

There are three types of developments after execution of the specific performance. A first development is a development in which a re-variation effect 736 is executed and the process returns to the start of change 730 to re-execute the change effect. The second development is a development in which the high expectation level effect is executed after the button effect is executed. A third development is a development in which a high expectation effect is executed without a button effect.

As a first development, after specific effects 731, 732, 733, 734, 735, a re-variation effect 736 can be executed. The re-fluctuation effect 736 is an effect for showing an image that rewinds the effect that has been displayed so far in order to re-execute the change effect from the beginning. Since the re-variable effect 736 can be executed after any of the specific effects 731, 732, 733, 734, 735, the re-execution of the variable effect can occur regardless of whether the execution timing of the specific effect is early or late.

As a second development, after specific effects 732, 733, 734, 735, either re-variation effect 736 or button effects 737, 738, 739, 740 can be executed. After the specific effect 731, no button effect is executed. Button effects 737, 738, 739, and 740 are effects that urge the player to input an operation to the effect button 109 and generate a high-expectation level effect or a re-fluctuation effect in response to the player's operation input. In the button effect, characters and button images such as "Press the button!" are displayed on the screen to prompt the user to press the effect button 109. FIG. In the button effect, depending on whether or not the player presses the effect button 109, a re-variation effect 736 or a high-expectation effect is displayed. However, when the button effect occurs or when the effect button 109 is pressed, the possibility of the high expectation effect occurring becomes higher than the possibility of the re-fluctuation effect 736 occurring after the button effect occurs. is set as When the high-expectation effect occurs, after the button effect 737, the high-expectation effect 741, after the button effect 738, the high-expectation effect 741, after the button effect 739, the high-expectation effect 741, after the button effect 740 , the high expectation level presentation 741 is executed respectively. The high expectation effects 741 to 744 are respectively variable effects such as a super reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and the timing at which the specific effect is displayed is 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 14 seconds, or 18 seconds. Candidates for expectations are also different. It is configured so that the later the display timing of the specific performance is, the higher the expectation is and the more likely it is to develop into a high-expectation-level performance.

As a third development, after the specific effects 732, 733, 734, 735, the high expectation level effects 741, 742, 743, 744 can be executed without the button effects. After the specific effect 731, the high expectation level effect is not executed. As described above, various types of high-expectation effects 741, 742, 743, and 744 are prepared as super reach effects, and the level of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type. It is configured so that it can easily develop into a highly anticipated production.

When the variation performance is re-executed from the variation start 730 through the re-variation performance 736, either one of the first to third developments is repeated again, or one of the variation stops 745-749. However, the re-execution of the re-variation performance or the re-execution of the variation performance may be limited to two times for one symbol variation of the special symbol.

The time from the start of variation 730 to the specific effect or stop of variation is 2 seconds, 6 seconds, 10 seconds, 14 seconds, and 18 seconds. Conceivably, variable performance patterns are prepared for the number of types of development, and any one of them can be selected by the performance determining means 303. - 特許庁

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect process of the second special variation effect. The second special variable effect is a modified variable effect pattern of the first special variable effect, and the development after the specific effect is displayed is particularly different. When the production is started from the fluctuation start 750, the specific production can be executed at the timing of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. That is, there are two special effects 751 that pause after 2 seconds and a specific effect 755 that pause after 6 seconds. Different from the specific effects 731 to 735 in FIG. 41, the specific effects 751 and 755 are effects in which the pause time of the variable effect exceeds a predetermined time, and the longer the duration of the pause, the more likely the high expectation level effect will occur. is set to be high. For example, the playback of the entire video displayed on the screen is paused and the color of the entire screen is reversed, and the stop state is maintained (so-called freeze state) for several seconds to ten-odd seconds. The stop time of the specific effect 751 is 4 seconds, 8 seconds and 12 seconds, and the stop time of the specific effect 755 is 4 seconds, 8 seconds and 16 seconds. When the specific effects 751 and 755 are not displayed, the fluctuation stops 759 .

When the specific effect 751 is displayed, if the freeze state continues for 4 seconds and develops into a high expectation level effect 752, and if the freeze state continues for 8 seconds and develops into a high expectation level effect 753, the freeze state is 16. It may develop into a high-expectation presentation 754 after it lasts for seconds. Various types of high-expectation performances 752, 753, 754 are prepared as super-reach performances, and the level of expectation for a big hit varies depending on the type, and in particular, the longer the freeze state is, the higher the expectation develops into a high-expectation performance. configured for ease of use. Also, when the specific effect 755 is displayed, if the freeze state continues for 4 seconds and then develops into a high expectation level effect 756, after the freeze state continues for 8 seconds then develops into a high expectation level effect 757, the freeze state may develop into a high-expectation presentation 758 after continues for 16 seconds. Various types of high-expectation performances 756, 757, and 758 are prepared as super-reach performances, and the level of expectation for a big hit varies depending on the type, and in particular, the longer the freeze state is, the higher the expectation develops into a high-expectation performance. configured for ease of use. In addition, the high expectation level performances 752 to 754 and 756 to 758 include high expectation level performances with higher expectations for big hits than the high expectation level performances 756 to 758 of FIG. The high-expectation performance developed through the freeze state is set so that the expectation for the big hit is likely to be higher than the high-expectation performance developed through the freeze state. As a modification, when the high-expectation-level performance that develops through the freeze state is a specific high-expectation-level performance (for example, only when the super-ready-reach performance is E among the super-reach performances A to E), the big hit is confirmed. may be configured to

Here, the end timing of the temporary stop (freeze state) of the specific effects 751 and 755 is synchronized with the occurrence timing of any one of the specific effects 731-735 in FIG. That is, the specific effect 751 that occurs 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation 750 is synchronized with the specific effect 732 that occurs 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation 730 if the freeze continues for 4 seconds, and if the freeze continues for 8 seconds It is synchronized with a specific effect 733 that occurs 10 seconds after the start of variation 730, and if the freeze continues for 16 seconds, it is synchronized with a specific effect 735 that occurs 18 seconds after the start of variation 730. In addition, the specific effect 755 that occurs 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation 750 is synchronized with the specific effect 733 that occurs 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation 730 if the freeze continues for 4 seconds, and if the freeze continues for 8 seconds It is synchronized with a specific effect 734 that occurs 14 seconds after the start of variation 730, and if the freeze continues for 12 seconds, it is synchronized with a specific effect 735 that occurs 18 seconds after the start of variation 730. In this way, at least the effect patterns with which the display end timing of the specific effect is synchronized have a common variation time, and therefore may be associated with the same pattern as the variation pattern of the special symbols. In this way, various combinations are conceivable depending on the difference in the time from the start of fluctuation 750 to the specific effect and the difference in the duration of the freeze state, and variable effect patterns are prepared for each type of development, and one of them determines the effect. It can be selected by means 303 .

As described above, the earlier the occurrence timing of the specific effect, the lower the possibility that the button effect or the high-expectation effect will occur, but the higher the possibility that the re-variation effect will occur. More specifically, if the time from the start of the variable production or the re-execution of the production to the pause is relatively short, there is a possibility of a button production (after generating a high expectation production or a re-variation production) Alternatively, it is set so that the possibility of occurrence of the high-expectation effect is low, but the possibility of occurrence of the re-variation effect is high. Conversely, the later the occurrence timing of the specific effect is, the lower the possibility that the button effect or the re-fluctuation effect will occur, but the higher the possibility that the high-expectation effect will occur. More specifically, if the time from the start of the fluctuation or re-execution of the production to the pause is relatively long, compared to the case where the time from the start of the fluctuation or the re-execution of the production to the pause is relatively short, the button production There is a possibility of generating a re-fluctuation effect or a high-expectation effect after the Comparing the ratio of occurrence of re-variation production and the ratio of occurrence of high-expectation production, (1) If the time from the start of fluctuation or re-execution of production to temporary stop is relatively long, 3:7 If the time from the start or re-execution of the effect to the pause is relatively short, set it to 8:2. , 9:1 if the time from the start of the fluctuation or the re-execution of the presentation to the temporary stop is relatively short). In this way, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the generation timing of the specific performance and the duration of the temporary stop, and a novel performance can be realized in which the player pays particular attention to the lateness of the generation timing of the specific performance and the length of the duration of the specific performance. However, as shown in FIG. 41, from the specific effect 731 that occurs two seconds after the start of the variation 730, it does not develop into the button effect or the high-expectation effect. Exceptions are provided such that even if the occurrence timing of the specific effect is short, it can develop into a more expected effect, such as from the specific effect 751 that occurs after the shortest 2 seconds. , giving the performance a sense of surprise. It should be noted that even from the specific effect 731 that occurs after the shortest two seconds from the start of the fluctuation 730, it may be configured so that it can develop into a button effect or a high-expectation effect with a low probability. Further, as a modification of the temporary stop (freeze state) in the specific effect, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped or hidden during the freeze, while the alternate pattern or simple pattern may continue to fluctuate. As another modified example, the pending ball image may be hidden during freezing, while the pending number image may be continuously displayed. In that case, even if there is a new ball in the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12) in the situation where the number of reservations for the first lottery (or the number of reservations for the second lottery) is less than 4 , The held ball image corresponding to the first winning lottery held with the ball entry (or the held ball image of the second winning lottery held) will not be newly displayed, but in the first winning lottery The corresponding pending number image (or the pending number image corresponding to the second lottery) is updated and displayed (for example, the display of "3" is updated to the display of "4"). The pending ball image indicates the number of pending first winning lotteries (or second winning lotteries) by the number (0 to 4) of graphic icons such as stars and circles. displayed at the bottom. The pending number image indicates the number of the first lottery (or the second lottery) with a single number (either number "0", "1", "2", "3", or "4") and is displayed, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen.

In addition, for example, a combination of 10 seconds and 14 seconds, a combination of 6 seconds and 18 seconds, a combination of 14 seconds and 10 seconds, a combination of 18 seconds and 6 seconds, the total time is 24 seconds, and the corresponding special symbols The variation pattern is associated with the same variation pattern of 24 seconds, and the performance determining means 303 determines which combination to use.

<Ninth embodiment> Special variation effect Since the basic configuration of the ninth embodiment is common to the first to eighth embodiments, the description of common points is omitted, and the first to eighth embodiments are particularly closely related. The description will focus on the differences from the eighth embodiment.

In the case of designing to correspond to a common variation pattern for a plurality of types of variation performance patterns with different expectations for big wins and deviation variation performance patterns such as the special variation performance described in the eighth embodiment, the number of types of variation patterns is suppressed. On the other hand, it is not easy to design a method of selecting each of the plurality of types of variable effect patterns so as to have different degrees of expectation for big wins. Therefore, in this embodiment, by constructing a variation pattern by combining a plurality of types of basic variation patterns and a plurality of types of variation addition patterns, while suppressing the number of patterns themselves and configuring various variation times by combining, each combination By separating the options of the performance pattern and the selection probability, even the variation patterns of the same variation time are selected with different probabilities. That is, even if the combination of the variation pattern and the variation addition pattern having the same variation time, the selection probability differs depending on which table the variation addition pattern is selected based on. As a result, even with the same variation pattern (variation time), the degree of expectation for a big win can be made different depending on the performance pattern selected. The variation pattern corresponding to the special variation effect described in the eighth embodiment is a combination of one of the plurality of types of basic variation patterns and the addition of one of the plurality of types of variation addition patterns to the variation time. Configured.

FIG. 43 is a diagram of a table schematically illustrating the correspondence between the types of basic variation patterns and the types of additional variation pattern tables. The basic variation pattern shown in this figure is an example for explaining a variation pattern particularly corresponding to the special variation effect pattern. The plurality of types of basic variation patterns include a plurality of patterns having common variation performance contents and variation times. Variation pattern number “0” is the basic variation pattern of “ultra-shortened variation”, variation pattern number “1” is the basic variation pattern of “shortened variation”, and variation pattern number “2” is the basis of “normal variation” It is a variation pattern. These basic variation patterns are selected when they are out of line, and are associated with "0" as the variation addition pattern table number. (Details of the variation addition pattern table will be described later). As the basic variation pattern, one of these "ultra-shortened variation", "shortened variation" and "normal variation" is selected according to the number of held balls. For example, when the number of held balls decreases from 4 to 3, "super shortened variation" is selected, when the number of held balls decreases from 3 to 2, "shortened variation" is selected, and the number of retained balls decreases from 2 to 1. and when decreasing from 1 to 0, "Normal Variation" is selected. For example, even if the random number for determining the variation pattern is the same predetermined value, different basic variation patterns (one of "super-shortened variation", "shortened variation", and "normal variation") depending on the number of balls held at that time can be selected.

On the other hand, basic variation patterns "A" to "K" with variation pattern numbers "3" to "13" are variation patterns corresponding to special variation effect patterns. The basic variation patterns "A" to "K" do not have different selection probabilities depending on the number of retained balls, and regardless of the number of retained balls, one of the basic variation patterns is selected according to the lottery value for determining the variation pattern. be done. The basic variation patterns "A" and "B" correspond to the same effect type, and have different variation times as basic variation patterns. These are associated with the same "1" variation addition pattern table, and one of the plurality of types of variation addition patterns is selected based on the same table. As a result, even with the same effect type, a plurality of variation times are selected by combining the basic variation pattern and the variation addition pattern, and the same variation addition pattern is added to the basic variation patterns "A" and "B". However, since the basic fluctuation patterns "A" and "B" have different fluctuation times and different selection probabilities, different jackpot expectations can be suggested.

The basic variation patterns ``C'' and ``D'' correspond to the production contents with character A as a motif, and the variation patterns ``E'' and ``F'' correspond to the presentation contents with character B as a motif, and variations as basic variation patterns. times are different from each other. The basic variation patterns "C" and "D" are associated with the variation addition pattern table No. 2, and the basic variation patterns "E" and "F" are associated with the variation addition pattern table No. 3. there is Although the basic variation patterns "C", "D", "E", and "F" have different variation times, there are a plurality of combinations in which the total variation time is the same depending on the added variation addition pattern. However, the selection probability is different for each basic variation pattern, and the selection probability of each variation addition pattern also differs depending on the variation addition pattern table to be referred to, so even if the variation time is the same according to these combinations, different jackpot expectations can suggest.

The basic variation patterns "G", "H", "I", and "J" correspond to the performance contents with the character C as a motif, and the variation times as the basic variation patterns are different from each other. The basic variation patterns "G" and "H" are associated with the variation addition pattern table No. 4, and the basic variation patterns "I" and "J" are associated with the variation addition pattern table No. 5. It is Although the basic variation patterns "G", "H", "I", and "J" have different variation times, there are a plurality of combinations in which the total variation time is the same depending on the added variation addition pattern. However, the selection probability is different for each basic variation pattern, and the selection probability of each variation addition pattern also differs depending on the variation addition pattern table to be referred to, so even if the variation time is the same according to these combinations, different jackpot expectations can suggest.

The basic variation pattern "K" corresponds to the content of the effect with the character D as a motif, and is associated with the variation addition pattern table numbered "6". The basic variation pattern "K" may have the same total variation time as the combination of the basic variation patterns "A" to "J" and the variation addition pattern, depending on the variation addition pattern to be added. However, the selection probability is different for each basic variation pattern, and the selection probability of each variation addition pattern also differs depending on the variation addition pattern table to be referred to, so even if the variation time is the same according to these combinations, different jackpot expectations can suggest.

FIG. 44 is a diagram of a table schematically exemplifying the correspondence relationship between the types of the variation addition pattern and the types of the variation addition pattern table. In this figure, 30 types from "0" to "29" are exemplified in each row as the variation addition pattern. Each column from "Table 0" to "Table 6" corresponds to the variation addition pattern table from "0" to "6", and the size of the lottery value range assigned to each variation addition pattern in each table. The degree (number of values) is indicated in each column. Of the 30 types of variable addition patterns, "6" to "29" variable addition patterns are patterns indicating the number of re-variation effects or button effects, timing, and types, respectively.

When "ultra shortened variation", "shortened variation", and "normal variation" corresponding to the variation addition pattern table of "0" in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 are selected, the variation addition pattern table of "0" of FIG. is selected with a selection probability of 100%. That is, no variation addition pattern is added.

When "Variation A" and "Variation B" corresponding to the "1" variation addition pattern table in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 are selected, the "1" variation addition pattern table of FIG. Variation addition patterns with addition numbers "0" to "5" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns of variable addition numbers "1" to "5" correspond to "effect A" to "effect E", and the selection probabilities differ depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "effect A" is 30/256, whereas the selection probability of "effect C" is 70/256. "Production A" to "Production E" are fluctuation addition patterns corresponding to productions leading to high expectation level production or fluctuation stop without going through re-variation production or button production in the special fluctuation production pattern, and each additional production time is different.

When "Variation C" and "Variation D" corresponding to the "2" variation addition pattern table in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 are selected, the "2" variation addition pattern table in FIG. Variation addition patterns with addition numbers "6" to "9" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "6" to "9" correspond to "specific once A" to "specific once D", and the selection probabilities differ depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of "specific 1 time A" is 12/256, whereas the selection probability of "specific 1 time C" is 110/256. "Specific 1 time A" to "Specific 1 time D" are variable addition patterns corresponding to effects leading to a high expectation level effect or variable stop via one re-variation effect or button effect in the special change effect pattern. , the timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, respectively, and the effect time to be added is also different.

When "Variation E" and "Variation F" corresponding to the "3" variation addition pattern table in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 are selected, the variation addition pattern table "3" of FIG. Variation addition patterns with addition numbers "6" to "15" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "6" to "15" correspond to "specific once A" to "specific once J", and the selection probabilities differ depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of “specific once A” is 7/256, while the selection probability of “specific once C” is 64/256, and the selection probability of “specific once J” is 7/256. be. "Specific 1 time A" to "Specific 1 time J" are variable addition patterns that correspond to effects leading to a high expectation level effect or a variable stop via a re-variation effect or button effect once in the special change effect pattern. , the timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, respectively, and the effect time to be added is also different.

When "Variation G" and "Variation H" corresponding to the "4" variation addition pattern table in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 are selected, the variation addition pattern table "4" of FIG. Variation addition patterns with addition numbers "16" to "22" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns of variable addition numbers "16" to "22" correspond to "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G", and the selection probabilities differ depending on the lottery value range associated with each. For example, the selection probability of “specific 2 times A” is 12/256, while the selection probability of “specific 2 times E” is 55/256, and the selection probability of “specific 2 times G” is 85/256. be. "Specific 2 times A" to "Specific 2 times G" are variable addition patterns corresponding to effects that go through two re-variation effects and button effects in the special fluctuation effect pattern, leading to a high expectation level effect or a variable stop. , the timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, respectively, and the effect time to be added is also different.

When "Variation I" and "Variation J" corresponding to the "5" variation addition pattern table in the variation pattern table in FIG. 43 are selected, the variation addition pattern table "5" in FIG. Variation addition patterns with addition numbers "24" to "29" are selected with respective selection probabilities. The variable addition patterns of variable addition numbers “24” to “29” correspond to “specific 3 times A” to “specific 3 times G”, and the selection probability differs depending on the range of lottery values associated with each. For example, the selection probability of “specific 3 times A” is 12/256, while the selection probability of “specific 3 times E” is 60/256, and the selection probability of “specific 3 times G” is 79/256. be. "Specific 3 times A" to "Specific 3 times G" are variable addition patterns corresponding to effects leading to high expectation level effects or fluctuation stop via re-variation effects and button effects 3 times in the special fluctuation effect patterns. , the timing and type of the re-variation effect or the button effect are different, respectively, and the effect time to be added is also different.

When "variation K" corresponding to the "6" variation addition pattern table in the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 is selected, the variation addition pattern table of "6" in FIG. ” to “29” are selected with respective selection probabilities. These all-variation addition patterns have different selection probabilities depending on their associated lottery value ranges. For example, the selection probability of "effect A" is 7/256, while the selection probability of "specific once J" is 20/256. This No. 6 variable addition pattern table is prepared to adjust the selection probability of all variable performances and realize the suggestion of an appropriate degree of expectation for big hits according to the result of winning/failure judgment for each variable performance. Since all the variation addition patterns in FIG. 44 are associated with the variation addition pattern table No. 6 as options, all these variation addition patterns are always duplicated in a plurality of variation addition pattern tables. are associated with each other. Further, for example, the variation addition pattern of number "15" "specific once J" has a selection probability of 3/256 in the variation addition pattern table of number "3", whereas the variation addition pattern of number "6" Different selection probabilities are set, such as a selection probability of 20/256 in the pattern table. Therefore, even with the same variation addition pattern, it is possible to suggest different degrees of expectation for big wins, and it is possible to appropriately provide a difference in degrees of expectation for big wins for each performance. The combination of the basic variation pattern and the variation additional pattern selected based on the tables illustrated in FIGS. 43 and 44 is an example selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 in the low probability low base state. In the low-probability low-base state, the execution of the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52, which is not the main subject, is only exceptional, and in the second game, a small win occurs with a high probability. It is also conceivable that an act of illegally trying to get prize balls is done by intentionally generating Therefore, after setting the variation time of the basic variation pattern corresponding to the small hit to, for example, 8 minutes, one of the variation addition patterns is determined and added by referring to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6". The variable addition patterns with variable addition numbers "0" to "29" corresponding to the variable addition pattern table numbered "6" have different time values, and 30 types of variable times can be set in the form of 8 minutes + α as the variable time. . As a result, the randomness of the variation time can be ensured, the variation time can be appropriately dispersed so that the variation time is not always constant when a small win is achieved, and when the variation of the first special pattern 51 stops. can be made difficult to ascertain, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate operation by the player, such as aiming to enter the ball into the second start hole 12 at the timing of a fixed interval.

Based on the variation pattern table of FIG. 43 and the variation addition pattern table of FIG. 44, a combination of the basic variation pattern and the variation addition pattern is selected. Specifically, the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 selects a plurality of types of basic variation corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination by lottery based on the basic variation pattern table corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination. Choose one of the patterns. The first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 selects one of a plurality of types of variation addition patterns corresponding to the basic variation pattern by lottery based on the variation addition pattern table corresponding to the selected basic variation pattern. to select. At least one of the plurality of types of basic variation patterns is defined in the basic variation pattern table so as to have different selection probabilities depending on the result of the suitability determination. At least one of the plurality of types of variation addition pattern is defined in the plurality of variation addition pattern tables so that the selection probability differs depending on which of the plurality of variation addition pattern tables it is based on.

Here, when "variation K" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the content of the effect is the character D as a motif, as described above. "Variation K" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of selection at the time of a big hit to the probability of selection at the time of loss is 30:70. As the variation addition pattern, one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table of No. 6 in FIG. No matter which variation addition pattern is selected, in other words, no matter which of the “effect A” to “effect E” or “specific 1 time A” to “specific 3 times G” is selected (“specific 1 Even if “Time A” is selected or “Specific 3 times G” is selected, there is no difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit. The "probability of selection at the time of the big win" here is (probability of the big win x probability of selecting the "variation K" at the time of the big win), and refers to the appearance rate of the "variation K" corresponding to the big win. Also, the "probability of being selected in the event of failure" is (probability of failure×probability of "variation K" being selected in the event of failure), and refers to the appearance rate of "variation K" corresponding to failure. For example, the probability of a big hit is 1/100, the selection rate of "variation K" at the time of a big hit is 297/1000, the probability of loss is 99/100, and the selection rate of "variation K" at the time of loss is 7/1000. In some cases, the ratio of the probability of being selected on a big hit to the probability of being selected on a loss is 30:70. It should be noted that the "probability of being selected at the time of a big hit" and the "probability of being selected at the time of losing" have the same meanings (although the basic variation patterns to be selected are different).

On the other hand, when "Variation C" or "Variation D" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the content of the effect is the character A motif as described above. "Variation C" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of the big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss is 10:90, while the "variation D" is configured so that the probability of being selected at the time of the big win and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss is 10:90. It is configured so that the ratio of the probabilities that Note that "variation D" may or may not be longer than "variation C". Then, in either case, one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table of No. 2 in FIG. Although the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than using "variation C" as the basic variation pattern, no matter which variation addition pattern is selected, in other words, "effect A" to "effect E" or "specific one time A" to No matter which of the "specific 3 times G" effects is selected (whether "specific 1 time A" is selected or "specific 3 times G" is selected), the relationship does not change. In other words, the reliability differs depending on the production based on the basic variation pattern (for example, "variation C" corresponds to the production in which the character A is wearing a blue aura, but "variation D" corresponds to the production in which the character A is wearing a blue aura). It corresponds to the effect of changing the color of the aura to red over time after wearing the aura).

Further, when "Variation G" or "Variation I" is selected as the basic variation pattern, the content of the effect is the motif of the character C as described above. "Variation G" is configured such that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of the big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss is 30:70, while the "variation I" is configured to have the probability of being selected at the time of the big win and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss. It is configured so that the ratio of the probabilities that Note that "variation I" may or may not be longer than "variation G". Then, if it is "variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table of number "4" in FIG. One of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability as shown in the variation addition pattern table No. 5 of . That is, even though the same character C is used as a motif, the "variation I" can increase the number of occurrences of specific effects (re-variation effects, button effects, etc.). If you want to design so that the greater the number of occurrences of a specific effect, the higher the expectation of a big hit, by adopting such a relationship between the basic variation pattern and the variation addition pattern, even if the same character C is used as a motif. Among the performances executed based on the variation addition pattern, a performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win (a performance mode in which many specific performances are executed here) can be associated with a basic variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and such a combination. By increasing the selection probability of , it is possible to link the performance content of the notice performance (specific performance) and the actual big hit expectation. In this embodiment, the variation addition pattern tables corresponding to "variation G" and "variation I" are tables that do not select the same variation addition number (same variation addition pattern) ( For example, for specific 2 times A, since it can only be selected in the variation addition pattern table No. 4, it is not selected if “variation I” is the basic variation pattern), but “variation G” and “variation I” The variable addition pattern tables corresponding to each may be tables in which the same variable addition number (the same variable addition pattern) can be selected. For example, in both of the variation addition pattern tables corresponding to "variation G" and "variation I", if any of "specific 2 times A" to "specific 2 times G" is selectable, " In "Variation G", it is easy to select variation addition patterns such as "Specific 2 times A" and "Specific 2 times B", and in "Variation G", variation addition such as "Specific 2 times G" and "Specific 2 times G" Pattern selection may be facilitated. In that case, the closer the alphabet part such as "specific twice A" or "specific twice G" to "G" (the later in alphabetical order, that is, the larger in ascending order), the later the timing of occurrence of the specific effect, that is, It is desirable that the performance is highly expected for a big hit.

In the modified example, when "Variation G", "Variation I", and "Variation K" are selected as the basic variation patterns, the effect content is based on the character X, which is a common character, as a motif. "Variation G" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit to the probability of being selected at the time of failure is 70:30, and the "Variation I" is the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of failure. , and "Variation K" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of a big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of loss is 50:50. In the case of "Variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the "4" variation addition pattern table, and in the case of "Variation I", the selection shown in the "5" variation addition pattern table. One of the variation addition patterns is selected with probability, and in the case of "variation G", one of the variation addition patterns is selected with the selection probability shown in the variation addition pattern table of number "6".

Here, for the variable addition patterns from ``specific 2 times A'' to ``specific 2 times G'' with variable addition numbers of ``16'' to ``22'', the later in the alphabetical order, the later the timing of occurrence of the specific effect. However, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on which basic variation pattern it is added to. In the case of "Specific 2 times A", the probability of being selected by referring to the "4" variation addition pattern table in correspondence with "Variation G" is 12/256 as shown in the figure, whereas "Variation The probability of selection with reference to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in association with "K" is 7/256 as shown. In addition, in the case of "specific 2 times G", the probability of being selected by referring to the "4" variation addition pattern table in correspondence with "variation G" is 85/256 as shown in the figure, The probability of selection with reference to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in association with "variation K" is 7/256 as shown. Here, as described above, the "variation G" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of the big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss is 70:30, and the "variation K" is the probability of being selected at the time of the big win. Since the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of deviation is 50:50, even if the same variation addition pattern is selected, the case where it is added to "variation G" is more likely to be "variation K" It can be constructed so that the probability of being selected at the time of a big win is higher than when it is added, and the degree of expectation for a big win is high. Furthermore, when it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when "specific 2 times G" is added than when "specific 2 times A" is added ("specific 2 times A" or "specific 2 times The closer the alphabet part such as G" to "G" (the later in the alphabetical order), that is, the larger it is in ascending order, the later the timing of occurrence of the specific effect, that is, the effect with a high expectation of a big hit) , "Specific 2 The difference in selectivity between “variation G” and “variation K” is greater than when “variation A” is selected (very likely to be selected for “variation G”), which is a variation addition pattern “specific 2 times G is selected, the degree of expectation for a big hit as a variation pattern (basic variation pattern+variation addition pattern) for executing performance contents with the character X as a motif is higher. Because the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of the big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss is 70:30. It is clear that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when a variation additional pattern is selected and a variation pattern is constructed at "variation K" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of loss is 50:50 (the former is a big hit The expectation is 70%, and the latter is 50% for the big hit), and even if 'specific 2 times A' is added to 'variation G' or 'specific 2 times G' is added, the big hit expectation is 70. Even if "specific 2 times A" is added to "fluctuation K" or "specific 2 times G" is added, the degree of expectation for big win is 50%, but the degree of expectation for big win as a player is 70%. Since it is not known whether the "variation G" of is selected or the "variation K" with a jackpot expectation of 50% is selected (because the effect is the same in either case), the player's experience of the jackpot expectation As for the performance with character X as a motif that executes a specific performance corresponding to “specific 2 times A”, the variation addition pattern of “specific 2 times A” is selected with “variation G” with a 70% chance of hitting the jackpot. Since the ratio of the probability of being selected and the probability that the variation addition pattern of “specific 2 times A” is selected with “variation K” with a jackpot expectation of 50% is 12: 7, it is about 63%, and “specific 2 times G , the probability of selecting the variation addition pattern of ``Specific twice G'' with ``Variation G'' with 70% expectation of big win and 50% of expectation of big win. % of "Variation K" and the probability ratio of "Specific 2 times G" variation addition pattern being selected is 85:7, which is approximately 68%.

Also, in the variable addition patterns from "specific 3 times A" to "specific 3 times G" whose variable addition numbers are "23" to "29", the later in the alphabetical order, the later the timing of occurrence of the specific effect. However, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on which basic variation pattern it is added to. In the case of "Specific 3 times A", the probability of being selected by referring to the "5" variation addition pattern table in correspondence with "Variation I" is 12/256 as shown in the figure, whereas "Variation The probability of selection with reference to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in association with "K" is 7/256 as shown. In addition, in the case of "specific 3 times G", the probability of being selected by referring to the "5" variation addition pattern table in correspondence with "variation I" is 79/256 as shown in the figure. The probability of selection with reference to the variation addition pattern table numbered "6" in association with "variation K" is 7/256 as shown. Here, as described above, the "variation I" is configured so that the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of the big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss is 90:10, and the "variation K" is the probability of being selected at the time of the big win. Since the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of deviation is 50:50, even if the same variation addition pattern is selected, the case where it is added to "variation I" is higher than "variation K" It can be constructed so that the probability of being selected at the time of a big win is higher than when it is added, and the degree of expectation for a big win is high. Furthermore, when it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when "specific 3 times G" is added than when "specific 3 times A" is added ("specific 3 times A" or "specific 3 times The closer the alphabet part such as G" to "G" (the later in the alphabetical order), that is, the larger it is in ascending order, the later the timing of occurrence of the specific effect, that is, the effect with a high expectation of a big hit) , "Variation I" and "Variation K", which have the same character X as the motif, are a variation addition pattern with a small difference in selection rate between "Variation I" and "Variation K". “Specific 3 times G is selected, the degree of expectation for a big hit as a variation pattern (basic variation pattern+variation addition pattern) for executing performance contents with the character X as a motif is higher. Because the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of the big hit and the probability of being selected at the time of the loss is 90:10. It is clear that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when a variation additional pattern is selected and a variation pattern is constructed at "variation K" where the ratio of the probability of being selected at the time of loss is 50:50 (the former is a big hit The expectation is 90%, and the latter is 50%.) Even if "specific 3 times A" is added to "fluctuation I" or "specific 3 times G" is added, the expectation of big win is 90%. Even if "specific 3 times A" or "specific 3 times G" is added to "fluctuation K", the degree of expectation for big win is 50%, but the degree of expectation for big win as a player is 90%. Since it is not known whether the “variation I” of 1 is selected or the “variation K” with a jackpot expectation of 50% is selected (because the contents of the production are the same in either case), the player will experience the jackpot expectation As for the performance with the motif of character X that executes a specific performance corresponding to “specific 3 times A”, the variation addition pattern of “specific 3 times A” is selected with “variation I” with a 90% chance of hitting the jackpot. Since the ratio of the probability of being selected and the probability that the variation addition pattern of “specific 3 times A” is selected with “variation K” with a jackpot expectation of 50% is 12: 7, it is about 75%, and “specific 3 times G ', the probability of selecting the variation addition pattern of ``Specific 3 times G'' in ``Variation I'' with 90% of the expectation of big hit and the expectation of 50. % of "Variation K" and "Specific 3 times G" variation addition pattern ratio is 79:7, which is about 87%.

In addition, in the low-probability low-base state, if the result of the hit/fail judgment corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation of one of the multiple types of additional variation patterns for the variation time of one of the multiple types of basic variation patterns Additional time may be added, and a predetermined additional time (time different from the variable addition time) may be added. The additional time is, for example, 3 minutes, and functions as additional time for securing time for executing a performance to congratulate the big win in the case of a big win, and for further extending the variable time in the case of a small win. functions as time. This addition time is not limited to one type of 3 minutes, but the time value may be changed according to the basic variation pattern (for example, if the basic variation patterns in the case of a big hit are variations A and B, then 2 minutes, If the basic variation pattern in the case of a big hit is variation K, it is set to 3 minutes, etc.), and the selectivity of multiple types of time values is varied according to the basic variation pattern (for example, the basic variation pattern in the case of a big hit is In the case of variations A and B, 2 minutes is selected at 30% and 3 minutes is selected at 70%. If the basic variation pattern for a big hit is variation K, 2 minutes is selected at 60% and 3 minutes is selected. selected at 40%). In addition, in the case of a deviation, the additional time is not added. In addition, the plurality of types of basic variation patterns include variation patterns that can be selected regardless of whether the result of the win/loss determination corresponds to a big hit or a loss. As for the variation patterns that can be selected, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, the variation addition time of one of a plurality of types of variation addition patterns is added to the variation time; Additional time may not be added to the variable time. Of the plurality of types of variation patterns, only one predetermined type of variation addition pattern is associated with the variation pattern corresponding to the performance leading to the big win through the re-variation performance. A plurality of types of variation addition patterns are associated with the variation pattern corresponding to the performance leading to the big hit as the variation addition pattern that can be added.

<Tenth embodiment> Special variation effect Since the basic configuration of the tenth embodiment is common to the first to ninth embodiments, the description of the common points will be omitted, and the The description will focus on the differences from the seventh embodiment.

In the high base state, by continuously repeating short-time pattern fluctuations by super-shortening fluctuations or shortening fluctuations without reach normal deviation fluctuations, deviation fluctuations continue in the form of carving a certain tempo. However, in the high base state, the second game aimed at entering the second start hole 12 by hitting the right side is the main subject, so there is a possibility that a small hit may occur (or the first game ), and if a small win occurs unexpectedly in the interval, the tempo or rhythm of the continuous loss fluctuations will be disturbed, which may give the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, by aligning the time required for the small winning variation and the small winning game in the high base state with the time for the deviation variation, the disturbance of the tempo or rhythm is avoided. In the pattern fluctuation in the high base state of the present embodiment, the time from the stop of the fluctuation of the second special pattern to the start of the next fluctuation, regardless of whether the result of the judgment by the second judging means 222 corresponds to a small hit or a loss. (Hereinafter, the stop symbol fixing time is also simply referred to as "symbol fixing time") is constant (however, it is assumed that there is a hold for the next variation).

FIG. 45 is a time chart comparing the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the time of the small hit game and the time of the deviation fluctuation. (a) shows the time of small hit fluctuation stop and small hit game in the high base state, and (b) shows the time of normal fluctuation stop in the high base state. (c) shows the time of small hit fluctuation stop and small hit game in the low base state, and (d) shows the time of normal fluctuation stop in the low base state. In addition, although not shown, the period of small hit variation in FIG. 45(a) and the period of unusual variation in FIG. 45(b) are the same time.

The decorative pattern related to the second special pattern 52 is a high base when the design fixed time stopped and displayed in the pattern mode showing the small win, that is, the stop duration from the stop of the pattern to the start of the small win game is set as the first time. The symbol fixed time stopped and displayed in the symbol mode indicating other than the small win (for example, the normal deviation without the ready-to-win effect) in the state is the same time as the first time plus the time of the small win game. 2 hours. First, in FIG. 45(a), a period 770 is a small winning symbol fixing time (first time) in the high base state, which is, for example, 0.02 seconds. The period which combined period 772,774,776 is the time of the small hit game, for example, it is 1.084 seconds. In FIG. 45(b), the period 778 is the normal off pattern fixed time (second time) with no reach effect in the high base state, and the second time is the first time (for example, 0.02 seconds) and the small winning game. It is equal to the sum (eg, 1.104 seconds) of time (periods 772, 774, 776 combined, eg, 1.084 seconds).

Here, the time of the small winning game in the high base state of FIG. 45 (a) is the period 772 (fourth time, for example 0.04 seconds) which is the start demonstration time of the small winning game, and the ending demonstration of the small winning game. It is the total of a period 776 (fifth time, for example 0.04 seconds) which is time and a period 774 (sixth time, for example 1.004 seconds) which is the execution time of the small winning game. The period 774, which is the execution time of the small winning game, is, for example, the sum of the opening time (time to maintain the opening) of 1.000 seconds and the closing time (time required for closing) of 0.004 seconds.

As a result, even if small hits and normal misses are alternately mixed and continued in the high base state, the fluctuation effect is engraved at the same tempo, so that the player does not feel unnecessary discomfort, and the small hits and normal misses are not distinguished naturally. It can be a directing.

In addition, in FIG. 45(c), the period 780 is the small winning design fixing time in the low base state, and is the same time as the period 770 (small winning design fixing time in the high base state) (for example, 0.02 seconds). . The sum of the periods 782, 784 and 786 is the time of the small winning game in the low base state, which is longer than the time of the small winning in the high base state, for example 1.5 seconds. In FIG. 45(d), the period 788 is the fixed time of the abnormal symbols without the ready-to-win effect in the low base state, which is shorter than the fixed time (second time) of the abnormal symbols without the ready-to-win effect in the high base state. (third time, eg 0.5 seconds). The time of the small winning game in the low base state is the period 782 (seventh time different from the fourth time, for example 0.1 second) which is the starting demonstration time of the small winning game, and the period which is the ending demonstration time of the small winning game. 786 (the eighth time different from the fifth time, eg 0.396 seconds) and the period 784 (the sixth time, eg 1.004 seconds) which is the execution time of the small winning game. Thus, the time of small hit fluctuation stop and small win game in the low base state (Fig. 45 (c)) is longer than the time of small hit fluctuation stop and small win game in high base state (Fig. 45 (a)) . In addition, the time for stopping abnormal fluctuations in the low base state (FIG. 45(d)) is shorter than the time for stopping abnormal fluctuations in the high base state (FIG. 45(b)). Therefore, the time of the small hit fluctuation stop and the small hit game in the low base state (Fig. 45 (c)) and the time of the normal fluctuation stop in the low base state (Fig. 45 (d)) do not match.

As a modification, when the result of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol 52 in the high base state corresponds to a small hit, the reach performance or the battle performance is not executed, while the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol 52 is performed in the high base state. If the result of (1) corresponds to the loss, a ready-to-win effect or a battle effect may be executed. In this case, the pattern fixing time in the deviation fluctuation of the second special pattern 52 for executing the out reach production or the battle production in the high base state, and the pattern fixing time in the small hit fluctuation of the second special pattern 52 in the high base state. and is preferably the same time (for example, 0.1 seconds), in the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design 52 that executes the reach production or battle production out of the high base state It is preferable that the temporary stop time before the fixed stop is longer than the temporary stop time before the fixed stop in the decorative symbols corresponding to the small hit variation of the second special symbol 52 in the high base state. Here, the total value of the temporary stop time and the symbol fixing time when executing the reach production or the battle production (the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the next fluctuation in the case where the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation) is the reach production Or the total value of the temporary stop time when the battle production is not executed, the design fixed time and the execution time of the small hit game (when the change is a small hit change, the time from the start of the change to the start of the next change) It is more preferable to set the same or substantially the same time value, and with such a configuration, in the variable display that does not execute the reach production or the battle production, even if the small winning game time is included, "from the fluctuation stop to the next The time until the fluctuation starts" can be the same or almost the same as the deviation fluctuation, and if the small hit fluctuation continues, the temporary stop time is short, so the tempo can be carved, and the reach production and battle production In variable display with a long production time, there is no sense of incongruity even if the temporary stop time is lengthened (because the reach production and battle production temporarily break the tempo).

<Eleventh embodiment> Update of background display Since the basic configuration of the eleventh embodiment is common to the first to tenth embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the first to tenth embodiments are described. Mainly explained.

In the low probability low base state 620 of FIG. 33, the first game based on the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 by hitting to the left is the main subject, while the high base state (low probability high base state 622 and high probability high base state 624) and in the high probability low base state 626, the second game based on the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 by hitting to the right is the main subject. Therefore, in the low probability low base state 620, the background display on the screen of the effect display device 60 is updated with at least one of the start and stop of the variation of the first special symbol 51, and the variation of the second special symbol 52. As a general rule, the background display is not updated with the start and stop of fluctuation as a trigger. On the other hand, in the high base state (low probability high base state 622 and high probability high base state 624) and high probability low base state 626, the background with at least one of the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the second special symbol 52 as a trigger In principle, the display is updated, and the background display is not updated when the first special symbol 51 starts to fluctuate and stops fluctuating.

The background display is one of the elements that constitute the production mode or production stage, and background images are determined for each of a plurality of types of production modes or production stages. Which of the plurality of types of background images is displayed indicates which production mode or production stage state the user is in. The multiple types of background images differ from each other in elements such as the types of scenery and characters displayed as images, colors, and patterns. configured to be associative. Note that the updating of the background display and the display of the background image in each production stage are also referred to as "stage drawing".

FIG. 46 shows the relationship between game states and production stages. In this embodiment, the stage is switched between a plurality of production stages for each game state, and the game and production progress. For example, the low-probability low base state 620 includes at least two stages, from production stage A displaying background image A with character A as a motif to production stage B displaying background image B with character B as a motif. can be switched to At least two stages are included even in the low-probability high base state 622, and the effect stage C displaying the background image C is switched to the effect stage D displaying the background image D. At least two stages are included in the high probability high base state 624 as well, and the effect stage E displaying the background image E is switched to the effect stage F displaying the background image F. At least two stages are included in the high-probability low base state 626 as well, and the effect stage G in which the background image G is displayed is switched to the effect stage H in which the background image H is displayed.

In the low probability low base state 620, since the first game is the main subject, when the first special pattern 51 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image A is switched to the background image B with the start or stop of the pattern variation as a trigger. . In the high probability high base state 624, since the second game is the main subject, when the second special pattern 52 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image E is switched to the background image F with the start or stop of the pattern variation as a trigger. . The high-probability low-base state 626 is also based on the second game, so when the second special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image G is switched to the background image H with the start or stop of the symbol variation as a trigger. be done.

The low probability high base state 622 is also based on the second game, but exceptionally, either the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 has reached a predetermined number of times (the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 When the total number of variations of the special symbol 52 reaches a predetermined number of times, the background image C is switched to the background image D with the start or stop of the symbol variation as a trigger. That is, in the final symbol variation during the duration of the low-probability high base state 622, the background display can be updated with at least one of the variation start and variation stop of the second special symbol 52 as a trigger, and the first special symbol. The background display can also be updated using at least one of the variation start and variation stop of 51 as a trigger. The final symbol variation in the continuation period of the low probability high base state 622 refers to the 50th symbol variation in the high base state, for example, when the number of symbol variations reaches 50 times. Background image C (for example, a background corresponding to the low-probability high base state 622, which encourages the ally character to stand up) in the changes before the final change (up to the 49th change) of the low-probability high base state 622 is displayed, and in the final variation (50th variation) in the low-probability high-base state 622, the background image D (for example, the low-probability high-base state 622 ends, and the winning ball in the low-probability high base state 622 background for displaying numerical results) is displayed. Since the number of symbol variations in this case is the sum of the number of variations of the first special symbol 51 and the number of variations of the second special symbol 52, the symbol variation reaching the 50th time, which is the final period, is the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51. There is a mixture of a certain case and a case of the second special symbol 52 symbol variation. Therefore, even if either the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 reaches the end of the symbol variation, update processing such as changing the background image is performed with the start or stop of the symbol variation as a trigger. make it possible.

As described above, the stage drawing in each production stage is basically executed with the start or stop of the fluctuation of the main pattern in the current game state among the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. . However, if at least one of the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is reset due to a predetermined error, information indicating in which production stage the reset occurred is not backed up. It is not possible to immediately return to the production stage (that is, the background image cannot be drawn immediately). However, in order to return to the production stage as early as possible, not only the main pattern in the current game state, but also the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 exceptionally regardless of the game state. It is configured so that the stage drawing is executed even with the stop as a trigger.

As a result, in principle, the background display is updated appropriately according to the special symbols of the main game, but in special situations, it is possible to update the background display in response to the variable display of the special symbols of the non-main game. By doing so, it is possible to display an appropriate background even in exceptional circumstances.

As a modification, after the end of the duration of the low-probability high base state 622, the next design variation is started after the final symbol variation in the duration is completed (the variation stop command is transmitted). By this, or until the next symbol variation is started, the predetermined time (the time that is the display condition of the standby demo screen, and the first special symbol 51 is held in the low probability low base state 620 is 0 To immediately switch from background D (special background for displaying game results in low-probability high base state 622) to background A (normal background in low-probability low base state 620) after elapse of the time measured in the situation) normal background immediate switching designation command may be transmitted. Here, immediately after the end of the low probability high base state 622, it is assumed that the first reservation of the first special symbol 51 is 0, and in that situation, if there is a ball entering the first start port 11, that The background display is instantly switched by transmitting the normal background immediate switching specification command for switching to the normal background with the entry of the ball as a trigger. In addition, even if there is no entry into the first starting port 11 after the end of the duration of the low-probability high-base state 622, the predetermined time (the time that is the display condition of the standby demo screen, the first ball in the low-probability low-base state 622) The background display is instantly switched by transmitting this normal background immediate switching designation command together with the command to switch to the standby demo screen after the time elapsed in the situation where the suspension of the special symbol 51 is 0 (this In this case, the standby demo screen is displayed with priority, so the display content that the player can actually see is the standby demo screen, and when the display of the standby demo screen ends, the normal background is displayed) .

<Twelfth embodiment> Special variation effect Since the basic configuration of the 12th embodiment is common to the first to eleventh embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the first to eleventh embodiments are focused. to explain.

In this embodiment, a count-up display is used as the display of the number of won prize balls on the screen, and each time the increase in the number of won prize balls in the high-probability low base state and/or high base state reaches a predetermined number of balls, a prize is obtained. Execute a display that enlarges and emphasizes the number of balls. In this embodiment, each time the increment of the number of won prize balls reaches "2500", enlarged highlighting is performed. At this time, the enlarged highlighting of the number of prize balls is executed according to the accumulated number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the balls entering the big prize hole, so immediately after entering the big prize hole (game Immediately after ball detection), the number of prize balls is added and displayed. However, since the count-up display of the number of prize balls is displayed while dynamically increasing the number in units of one ball or several balls, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the entry into the big prize opening Even if the cumulative number of balls (real value) has already reached a multiple of '2500', the displayed number is less than the actual value until the count-up display of the number of prize balls catches up to the display of a multiple of '2500'. . Therefore, in order not to make the player feel uncomfortable, this numerical difference is processed as follows.

The effect determination means 303 (sub CPU 310) manages the total number of prize balls to be paid out. The effect control means 304 (control CPU 320) counts up the total number of prize balls on the screen of the effect display device 60, and the total number of prize balls managed by the effect determination means 303 (sub CPU 310) reaches a specific number. When the number of prize balls is reached, even before the number of prize balls on the count-up display reaches the specific number, the number of prize balls is highlighted when the total is reached.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a screen displaying the number of winning balls during the small hit rush. (a) mainly shows the state during count-up display before enlarged highlighting, (b) shows enlarged highlighting, and (c) mainly shows the state of count-up display after enlarged highlighting.

In FIG. 47(a), a character 616 is displayed substantially in the center of the screen together with the background image of the small hit rush mode. Alternative patterns 601a, 601b and simple patterns 602a, 602b, 602c, 602d are variably displayed at the edges of the screen. A firing direction indicator 606 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. At the left end of the screen, the number of big hits 614, the total number of winning balls count display 607, the winning count lamp 618, and the number of small wins 615 are displayed. Here, the number of big hits 614 is the number of occurrences of the special game in the high-probability low-base state and/or high-base state (after shifting to the high-probability low-base state and/or high-base state, shifting to the low-probability low-base state is the number of times the player hits a big hit before the game starts), but the number of special games (first hit) in the low-probability low-base state that triggered the transition to the high-probability low-base state and/or the high-base state is "1 time ” may be added, and the total number of won prize balls count display 607 is the total number of prize balls won in the special game or small winning game in the high probability low base state and / or high base state (high probability low base State and/or the total number of prize balls won from the transition to the high base state to the transition to the low probability low base state) (however, the prize won in the small winning game in the high base state The number of balls is not added), but even if you add the number of prize balls won in the special game (first hit) in the low probability low base state that triggered the transition to the high probability low base state and / or high base state Well, the winning count lamp 618 is one in which an image imitating a lamp lights up one by one by entering a ball into a big winning opening opened during execution of a special game and/or a small winning game, and the number of small winnings 615 is , The number of occurrences of small win games in the high probability low base state (the number of small wins in the high probability low base state won between the transition to the high probability low base state and the transition to the low probability low base state ). As described above, the numerical value of the total won prize ball count display 607 indicates the sum of the number of prize balls won in the special game and the number of prize balls won in the small hit game, and in the example shown in the figure, the number is changed from "02180" to "02181". Indicates the moment to count up.

In FIG. 47(b), when the number of won prize balls managed by the effect determination means 303 reaches "2500", an enlarged prize ball number display 619 written in large letters "2500 GET" is displayed in the center of the screen. . At this time, "02350", which is the display content of the total number of won prize balls count display 607, is in the middle of counting up and is only a numerical value on the display, and is in a state of not catching up with the real number of the total number of won prize balls. is shown. In addition, with the display of the enlarged prize ball number display 619 as a trigger, the count up of the total won prize ball count display 607 is interrupted, and the numerical value of the total won prize ball count display 607 is changed to the real value shown in the enlarged prize ball number display 619. By updating, the unfinished count-up becomes the count-up completed. In the example of this figure, a part of the total winning ball number count display 607 overlaps with the enlarged winning ball number display 619 to make it difficult to see. The numerical value of the count display 607 is updated with the real numerical value. As a modification, the enlarged prize ball number display 619 is displayed in such a manner as to completely cover the total won prize ball count display 607, and the total won prize ball count display 607 is hidden during this time. may In addition, as another modification, even if the display of the enlarged number of prize balls 619 is displayed, the number of the total number of won prize balls is not updated to the real value shown in the number of expanded prize balls display 619. It may be configured so that the counting up of the prize ball count display 607 is not interrupted (continued).

In FIG. 47(c), after the enlarged prize ball number display 619 is erased, the total winning ball number count display 607 after being updated with the real number is displayed, and the count-up display is restarted from that number. .

As a modification, even when a specific effect display other than the enlarged prize ball number display 619, for example, an effect of displaying an image large enough to cover most of the screen occurs, the total won prize ball count display 607 is displayed. After hiding the display of the number of prize balls that was being counted up, when the display of the number of prize balls resumes due to the end of a specific effect display, the state where the count-up has not been completed has been counted up. The display may be resumed at . Specifically, a background change notice that covers most or all of the screen is provided. Hide (at this time, at the timing just before hiding, the incomplete count-up is not counted up), and after the background change notice is displayed for 10 seconds and disappears, the total number of winning balls The display of the count display 607 is restarted, and at the timing of the restart of the display, the display is restarted in a state in which the unfinished count-up has been counted up. Even if the time required to count up the unfinished portion is 10 seconds or more (for example, 20 seconds), 20 seconds have not passed after 10 seconds from the time the background change notice is displayed until it disappears ( The time required for counting up the unfinished portion has not elapsed), but the display of the total number of prize balls counted 607 is resumed in a state in which the unfinished portion of the count-up has been counted up. As a modification, when the background change notice occurs, when the display of the number of prize balls that was being counted up in the total number of prize balls count display 607 is hidden, The incomplete count-up may be counted up. In this case as well, the total number of winning balls count display 607 is displayed after the background change notice is displayed for 10 seconds and disappears. The display resumes in a state in which the unfinished count-up has been counted up.

In this embodiment, the effect determination means 303 (sub CPU 310) is configured to manage the total number of prize balls to be paid out, but it is configured to manage the total number of prize balls paid out (already paid out). In that case, the display of the total won prize ball count display 607 and the enlarged prize ball count display 619 or the count-up display is not based on the number of prize balls to be paid out, but is based on the number of prize balls to be paid out. It may be configured to display based on the number of awarded balls that have been paid out (already paid out).

For this embodiment and its modifications, "display of the number of prize balls won in the high-probability low base state and/or high base state", that is, "display of the accumulated number of prize balls won during the so-called consecutive wins" (hereinafter referred to as However, when the game state before or after the execution of a certain special game is a high-probability low-base state, "the number of winning balls in the special game and In the high probability high base state (from the transition to the high probability high base state to the big hit in the high probability high base state) Display of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in one or more small winning games The same configuration may be applied to the display of one set of totals"). In such a configuration, the display of the total number of prize balls won may simultaneously display the total display for consecutive games and the total display for one set. It is preferable to provide a count-up display for both of the total display of . As for the enlarged and highlighted display, both the total display of the consecutive game and the total display of one set may be enlarged and highlighted, but only one of them may be enlarged and highlighted. In addition, the timing of the enlarged and highlighted display may be when the total number of won prize balls count display reaches a specific number. Instead of displaying based on the total or total number of awarded balls paid out (already paid out) reaching a specific number, the total number of awarded balls count display reaches a specific number May be displayed based on

In addition, regarding the modification that displays both the total display during the consecutive game and the total display for one set, the total display during the consecutive game is switched immediately without the count-up display (for example, in the case of 15 prize balls , 2000→2001→2002→ . Alternatively, the display of the total for one set is switched immediately without displaying the count up (for example, in the case of 15 prize balls, the count is increased by 1 like 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... instead of suddenly switching from 2000 to 2015), on the other hand, the total display during consecutive games may be configured to count up. In this case, the enlarged highlighting may be performed for both the total display of the consecutive game and the total display of one set, or only one of them may be enlarged and highlighted. The timing may be when the display of the total number of won prize balls reaches a specific number, that is, the total number of prize balls to be paid out managed by the effect determination means 303 (sub CPU 310), or It is not displayed based on the total number of paid out (already paid out) prize balls reaching a specific number, but based on the display of the total number of awarded balls count reaching a specific number. may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment and each modified example, the total display during the continuous game or the total display for one set has been described, but the same configuration may be applied to the display during the special game. That is, during the special game (for example, during the special game corresponding to the 10R probability variable jackpot), when performing the total display during the continuous chan and / and the total display of one set, the same as the present embodiment and each modification Depending on the configuration, a count-up display, an enlarged highlighting display, or a count display of the total number of winning balls may be performed. In this case, a count-up display, an enlarged highlighting display, and a count display of the total number of won prize balls are displayed based on the ball entering the big winning hole during execution of the special game (during execution of each round). However, in a special game with a small number of won prize balls, for example, a special game corresponding to a 2R normal jackpot, even if a ball enters the big prize hole, the count-up effect, enlarged highlighting, and the number of hits of 614 and the total number of prize balls won will be displayed. It is preferable to configure so that the number count display 607, winning count lamp 618, and number of small wins 615 are not displayed. In a special game with a relatively small profit, adopting the same mode of performance as a special game with a relatively large profit may cause a player to misunderstand that it is an advantageous jackpot, and this is prevented. This is because it is necessary to

During the special game, the number of prize balls acquired during the special game is added to the total number of prize balls (total display with the number of prize balls in the small winning game) such as the total number of won prize balls count display 607. is added in real time each time, and the display 607 for counting the total number of winning prize balls is updated and displayed. Here, the update display for adding the number of winning balls is displayed even if there is a next new ball (winning) during the addition effect of adding the number of winning balls for one winning ball (winning). addition performance is not interrupted, and the addition performance for the next ball entry is executed after the addition performance is completed. For example, while the display is switching from the display of "2400" to the display of "2415" (for example, "2400" → "2401" → "2402" → ... → "2415" is gradually counted up). During the display of "2402" in the performance), even if a ball entering the big winning opening 20 is detected, after the count up to "2415" is completed, the count up corresponding to the entering ball is started. do. As a modification, the previous count-up effect may be forcibly ended (the display of "2402" is counted up to "2415" at once), and the count-up corresponding to the ball entry may be started. In addition, the total number of winning balls may be displayed (another display) different from the total number of winning balls count display 607 in FIG. Cumulative value (total number of winning balls related to multiple special games, and during multiple small hit rushes that stay before or after those multiple special games are executed (multiple times of high probability low base state) ), and the total number of prize balls is only one special game and one small hit rush that stays before or after the special game is executed ( It is preferable to add up the number of won prize balls obtained in multiple times of high probability low base state).

For the main decorative design 600 and the alternative design 601 in this embodiment, the specifications described below (relationship between the main decorative design 600 and the alternative design 601) may be adopted.
(1) The display area of the main decorative symbol 600, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the substitute symbol 601 (for compensating the display state of the decorative symbol) for display collateral.
(2) The display position of the main decorative pattern 600 is set to a different display position depending on whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, so that the variety of production in the decorative pattern can be achieved according to the production mode. realizable. On the other hand, the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, so regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, the same display position does not need to be developed and designed. It is preferable to forgo the
(3) The display mode of the main decorative pattern 600 is different depending on whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, so that the variety of effects in the decorative pattern can be achieved according to the production mode. realizable. For example, in the first production mode, the main decorative pattern 600 is composed only of decorative patterns of numbers (decorative patterns such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second production mode, decorative patterns of numbers and decoration patterns of allied characters are combined to form main decorative patterns 600 (such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). decorative patterns). On the other hand, the alternative pattern 601 only has to play the role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, so regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, only the same display mode, for example, the number It is preferable to configure the substitute pattern 601 only with the decorative pattern and avoid unnecessary development and design.
(4) The display area of the main decorative pattern 600 is changed (moved) according to the changing situation (for example, whether it is in normal reach, whether it is in super reach, etc.). 600 renditions can be diversified. On the other hand, the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, so that the display area of the alternative pattern 601 can be kept unchanged (not moved) to avoid unnecessary development and design. preferred.
(5) The main decorative pattern 600 has a variable speed, such as low speed, medium speed, high speed, and super high speed, depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, is it at the start of the fluctuation, is it in the middle of the fluctuation, is it near the end of the fluctuation, etc.)? By doing so, the production of the main decorative pattern 600 can be diversified. On the other hand, since the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the decorative pattern, the variable speed of the alternative pattern 601 is not changed, or the number of steps to be changed is reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design. As for the direction of variation, the main decorative pattern 600 allows variation not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allows variation in multiple directions). It is preferred to have only a top-to-bottom variation.
(6) The main decorative symbol 600 is temporarily stopped (stopped at the timing when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops) (stops at the timing when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops). Temporary stop with slight shaking fluctuation in the middle of fluctuation), and at that time, a special pattern that is a decorative pattern other than numbers (for example, the word "super" is written to predict the development of super reach. By temporarily stopping the main decorative pattern 600, the effect of the main decorative pattern 600 and other effects can be associated with each other. On the other hand, the alternative pattern 601 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, so the alternative pattern 601 does not temporarily stop, and the special pattern does not temporarily stop. It is preferable to forgo.
(7) The main decorative pattern 600 overlaps, that is, is superimposed on, the display area of other notice effects (for example, friend character appearance effects and enemy character appearance effects in FIG. 47, etc.). Such a superimposed display is permitted in order to make the most of the area on the screen to produce a powerful effect. It is desirable to design the display area so that it does not overlap (not be superimposed) with the display area for the other notice effect. However, regarding the relationship with a special notice effect that inevitably overlaps (for example, a background notice displayed on the entire screen), the display priority of the alternative symbol 601 is set higher than the display priority of the special notice effect. It is preferable to set it higher (set so that the alternative symbol 601 is displayed in front of the special announcement effect). Also, since it is desirable that the shooting direction indicator 606 shown in FIG. It is desirable to design it so that it is not superimposed. However, when the display area of the main decorative pattern 600 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the main decorative pattern 600 and the display area of the firing direction indicator 606 may overlap (displayed superimposed). In that case, the display priority of the main decorative pattern 600 is set lower than the display priority of the firing direction indicator 606 (the main decorative pattern 600 is set to be displayed behind the firing direction indicator 606). is preferred.
(8) In the main decorative pattern 600, in addition to performing variation (for example, moving from top to bottom), predetermined actions are performed at the start of variation, immediately after temporary stop, after reach establishment, during temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be referred to as fluctuation start action, temporary stop action, ready-to-reach establishment action, and shaking action). For example, in the case of non-reach (when the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601 are displayed as "624" when the determination is stopped), the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the main decorative pattern 600 are displayed at the start of the fluctuation. After performing the operation that expands all of them, it starts to fluctuate, and after that, when the left pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "6" temporarily stops and then shakes. Continue, after that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, and after "4" temporarily stops, continue the swinging motion, and then bounce when the middle symbol temporarily stops. After performing such operation, "2" temporarily stops and performs a little swinging operation, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern are finished. In this case, the alternative pattern 601 does not perform any action. Also, in the case of normal reach (when the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the main decorative pattern 600 After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and after "2" temporarily stops, the shaking operation continues. After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action is continued after "2" temporarily stops, and then the left pattern to notify that it is a reach. And the right pattern rotates and continues the shaking motion again, and after that, when the middle pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, "1" temporarily stops and shakes a little After that, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left design, the middle design, and the right design are finished (the middle design does not rotate). In this case, the alternative pattern 601 does not perform any action. Also, in the case of super reach (when the main decorative pattern 600 and the alternative pattern 601 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of fluctuation, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the main decorative pattern 600 After performing an operation that expands all of them, it starts to fluctuate, and after that, when the left pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing operation, "2" temporarily stops and then shakes. Continue, after that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, perform a bouncing action, then continue the swinging action after "2" temporarily stops, and then left to notify that it is a reach After the design and right design rotate, they continue to swing again. After that, while the left and right designs are swinging, the middle design fluctuates (at this time, the middle design expands. It fluctuates from top to bottom in the state of overlapping, and the left and right symbols that previously did not overlap or had a low overlap ratio are overlapping or having a high overlap ratio), and then super In order to execute the reach effect, the background is changed from the normal background to the reach background, and when the result of the deviation is notified in the super reach effect, the reach background is changed to the normal background, and after the transition, the left pattern, the middle The pattern and the right pattern continue the shaking motion for a predetermined time, and then all the motions of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are finished at the fixed stop timing (the middle pattern does neither the bouncing motion nor the rotating motion). In this case, the alternative pattern 601 does not perform any action. With this configuration, the main decorative pattern 600 can be diversified. is configured so that it does not perform any particular operation, so that unnecessary development and design can be avoided. Also, even during the period from when the fluctuation is stopped until the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the main decorative pattern 600 will perform a swinging motion after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation has stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the alternative symbol 601 does not perform any action. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game even during the game standby (while the symbols are stopped), and the substitute symbol 601 does not perform the swinging motion, thereby notifying that the game is on standby. can be guaranteed. In addition, when the standby demo screen is displayed, the main decorative pattern 600 is hidden, but the display of the alternative pattern 601 is preferably continued. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the display of what symbols are stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demonstration screen. In addition, among the main decorative symbols 600, a specific symbol (for example, a medium symbol "7") may be configured so that the predetermined action is not performed or has a lower probability of performing than other symbols. This predetermined motion may be, for example, the aforementioned temporary stop motion (jumping motion). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of actions in a specific pattern.

Also, regarding the count-up effect in this embodiment, it is preferable to be performed even during the execution of the special game (based on the detection of the ball entering the big winning opening in the special game), and the specifications described below are adopted. good too.
(1) A count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a game ball within a prescribed count number (in particular, a count-up production corresponding to the 10th count, which is the prescribed count number) is being performed, and there are still 15 balls. If over-winning occurs when the count-up for the count of 15 balls has not been completed, the count-up for the count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed has been completed (the count for 15 balls is performed), the count-up effect corresponding to the over winning is preferably started. Here, if the over winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or jackpot end demo is started), The count-up effect itself corresponding to the over winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round started after the interval period has passed), but the next round (the next round started after the interval period has passed) round) is executed during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning, even if the ball enters the big winning opening 20, the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is performed at the timing of entering the ball. When the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for the count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed has been completed (15 balls It is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the ball entering the big winning hole 20 in the next round is started after the count is performed.
(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from “N” to “N+1”) is set to “0.03 seconds”, that is, in “0.03 second” increments. is counted up. The execution time of the count-up effect is the time value required for the count-up of one prize ball, and the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) given when one game ball enters the big winning hole 20. It is derived by multiplying the value, and the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even during execution of the special game, the count-up effect is not executed during execution of the start demonstration and during execution of the end demonstration. Also, the execution time of the count-up effect is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as "interval period") set after each unit game is finished. The interval time is a standby time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demo, and is a unit game which is a period during which closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is started and closed is maintained. This is the waiting time or the end demo waiting time, which is set to "2 seconds" in common for all round games. In addition, the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball enters the big winning hole 20 just before the end of a certain unit game. Even if the count-up effect is performed based on the above, the count-up effect is completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up effect will extend beyond the interval period until the next unit game or the end demo (there is a possibility that the interval period will be exceeded in the case of over-winning). , a break between each unit game, or a break between the final unit game and the end demo.
(3) The count-up presentation time is set shorter than the end demonstration execution time. As described above, the count-up effect time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effect). The end demo execution time is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has passed until the special game is finished. In other words, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final unit game, the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 20 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as a winning ball payout target, and it is determined as an illegal entry). is set as the remaining time (delay time) of the unit game during which there is a possibility that the unit game will be detected (not detected), but the execution time of the end demonstration is valid for game balls to enter the big winning opening 20 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for the game (production mode) after the end of the special game separated from the unit game, which has no possibility of being detected in the second stage. By configuring the count-up effect time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the end demonstration execution time (20 seconds), the game ball enters the big prize winning opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game. Even if the count-up performance is performed based on the ball being thrown, or more specifically, even if an over-winning occurs in the final unit game, the big winning port 20 is closed after the final unit game. If the specification is such that the count-up effect is performed even later (even during the end demonstration period), the count-up effect will be completed within the end demonstration period. Therefore, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the end demonstration period until the variable display after the end of the special game, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation is clearly defined. can do.
(4) When a specified count number of game balls enter the big winning hole 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up production time for the specified count number in this one unit game (one unit The count-up effect for the number of prize balls obtainable in the game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time)×10 balls (specified count number)=4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effect), as described above. In this embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time for the specified count number is shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, so that the final unit Even if a plurality of count-up performances are continuously performed based on the fact that a plurality of game balls enter the big winning hole 20 continuously just before the end of the game, after the final unit game is completed. If a count-up performance is performed even after closing a certain big winning hole 20 (even during the big win end demonstration period), the count-up performance is completed within the big win end demonstration period. Therefore, the count-up performance is not performed over the period of the jackpot end demonstration period and until the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation is clearly defined. can be

<Thirteenth embodiment>
Also in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the number of small-hit games per unit time increases, that is, a game state in which the frequency of occurrence of small-hit increases, that is, a so-called small-hit rush can be executed. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is (1) a parallel spec that allows the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 to fluctuate in parallel at the same time, (2) in the second winning lottery The small-hit probability is set to be relatively high (for example, the small-hit probability in the first lottery is lower than the small-hit probability in the second lottery, or there is no possibility of a small-hit); It is a spec that enhances the variation efficiency of the second special symbol 52 in a specific game state. However, in a modification, specs other than the small hit rush may be used, and in that case, parallel specs that allow at least the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 to fluctuate in parallel at the same time may be used. Since the basic configuration of the 13th embodiment is common to the 1st to 12th embodiments, the description of the common points is omitted, and the differences from the 1st to 12th embodiments, especially the 5th and 6th embodiments that are strongly related The description will focus on the differences from the example.

(1) The production control means 304 displays the decorative pattern corresponding to either one of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 as a relatively large main decorative pattern in accordance with the game state. The decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern is variably displayed as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the performance display device. The non-main decorative design is an alternative design similar to the alternative design 601 shown in FIG. 38 of the fifth embodiment or FIG. 39 of the sixth embodiment, for example. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for directing the result of the judgment result, and is a display form that is simplified (in other words, simplified, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern (that is, the main decorative pattern). , and is usually displayed in a simpler variation process than decorative patterns. The alternative pattern has an external display form corresponding to the portion indicating the pattern type of the normal decorative pattern, for example, has a display form representing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the pattern type. In addition, the alternative pattern is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area where the decorative design is variably displayed. Typically, it is located at a position where it is difficult for elements other than the design to interfere with the main effect, such as a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuating display. The alternative pattern is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative pattern, but has a display form in which at least the type of pattern can be identified in appearance. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size. As the main decoration pattern, only one of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 is displayed, whereas the alternative patterns are the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern. Two sets of substitute designs are displayed corresponding to both of 52, and among the two sets of substitute designs, the substitute design corresponding to the special design which is not the subject is positioned as the non-subject decoration design.

FIG. 48 illustrates the screen configuration of the effect display device 60 in the thirteenth embodiment. A set of main decorative patterns 800 are variably displayed using a wide area in the center of the screen of the effect display device 60.例文帳に追加A first alternative pattern 801 and a second alternative pattern 802 are variably displayed at the screen corners of the effect display device 60 . The main decorative pattern 800 is three decorative patterns that are displayed in a relatively wide range and in a large size, and corresponds to the special pattern that is displayed as the main one among the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. Fluctuating display. A first alternative design 801 and a second alternative design 802 are decorative designs displayed in a relatively narrow range and in a small size. is variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol 52 . Each of the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 is composed of a combination of three patterns. One of the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 is displayed in the same three pattern combination as the main decorative pattern 800 displayed corresponding to the main special pattern at that time. In the illustrated example, the first special symbol 51 is the main special symbol, the first alternative symbol 801 is displayed with the same "567" as the main decorative symbol 800, and the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 which is not the subject The alternative design 802 is positioned as a non-main decorative design. In the case of the special pattern in which the second special pattern 52 is the main subject, the pattern corresponding to the second special pattern 52 is displayed as the main decorative pattern 800, and the second alternative pattern 802 corresponds to the main decorative pattern 800 and is not the main. A first alternative design 801 corresponding to the first special design 51 is positioned as a non-main decorative design.

For example, in the low probability low base state 620, the main decorative pattern 800 and the first alternative pattern 801 are displayed corresponding to the first special pattern 51 which is the subject, and the second special pattern 52 which is not the subject is displayed. Only 2 alternative symbols 802 are displayed. The second special symbol 52 and the second alternative symbol 802 in the low probability low base state 620 are variably displayed based on an extremely long variation pattern such as 10 minutes.

In addition, in the low probability high base state 622, the high probability high base state 624, and the high probability low base state 626, the main decorative pattern 800 and the second alternative pattern 802 are displayed corresponding to the main second special pattern 52. , Only the first alternative symbol 801 is displayed in correspondence with the first special symbol 51 which is not the subject. The second special pattern 52 and the second alternative pattern 802 in the low probability high base state 622, the high probability high base state 624, and the high probability low base state 626 have a short fluctuation time of, for example, 1 to 2 seconds. , and the variation time of the big win is variably displayed based on the time variation pattern, such as 9 to 10 seconds, 1 minute, or 2 minutes. In addition, the second special symbol 52 in the low probability high base state 622, the high probability high base state 624, and the high probability low base state 626 is off and the special variation pattern is referred to as the variation time of the small hit (for example, the end of the big hit In the variable display period when the number of variable display times is a predetermined number after counting later, there are cases where a relatively long variation time such as 10 seconds or 30 seconds is selected, and refer to the special variation pattern table Periods may have different trends in fluctuation times for jackpots.

The main decorative pattern 800 may be displayed in a manner that is relatively conspicuous or highly visible as compared with the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802. For example, the main decorative pattern 800 is more conspicuous than the alternative patterns due to differences in color and decoration. It may be formed as It should be noted that the main decorative symbol 800 is not displayed in correspondence with the special symbol that is the subject of the game corresponding to the actual game state during the fluctuation immediately after the game state transitions, but is displayed before the game state transitions. A main decorative design 800 corresponding to the other special design may be displayed. For example, in the case of parallel specs as in the thirteenth embodiment, a specification in which the game state transitions at the start of the variable display of the special symbols is often adopted. When the variable display of the second special symbol 52 starts with the final variation of the high base state which is the main subject of , the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is changed as the main decorative pattern 800 even if it is internally in the low base state. It may appear as a performance. Therefore, the situation in which the main decorative symbol 800 is displayed corresponding to the game state is explained in the case where the game state does not transition before and after the variable display, and the variable display at the timing when the game state transitions. Exceptionally, it should be supplemented that the subject decorative symbol 800 that does not correspond to the special symbol that is the subject of the game state may be variably displayed. In such an exceptional timing, while the game state is transitioning, the game mode recognized by the player is often common. It can also be said that it is set corresponding to the production mode to be managed.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the design portion of the main decorative design 800 is used for the first alternative design 801 or the second alternative design 802 . In the modification, the main decorative design 800 of the alternative patterns is displayed depending on whether the decorative design corresponding to the first special design 51 or the decorative design corresponding to the second special design 52 is displayed in the main decorative design 800. A substitute pattern (one of the first substitute pattern 801 and the second substitute pattern 802) corresponding to the special pattern that is not displayed may be displayed in Chinese numerals or alphabets different from the display mode of the pattern of the main decorative pattern 800.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to enhance the distinguishability between the alternative patterns, and to substitute the main decorative pattern 800 to determine which of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 is the special pattern that is the subject of the current game. The player can be notified by associating with the pattern (common display mode).

At the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60, a maximum of eight holding lamp images 810 are displayed according to the number of holdings when the lottery value is held, and the changing lamp image 811 showing the changing lottery value is displayed at the bottom center of the screen. indicate. The shooting direction instruction image 812 for prompting the player to hit to the right is an image for instructing the player to hit to the right (hit ball aiming at the second start hole 12 or the big winning hole 20 arranged on the right side of the game area 81). It is an image. In this figure, for the sake of convenience, an example in which the shooting direction instruction image 812 is displayed during a game mainly based on the first special symbol 51 When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the special pattern 52), the shooting direction instruction image 812 mainly includes the second special pattern 52 such as the low probability high base state 622 and the high probability low base state 626. It is displayed during the game or when a big win or a small win is being executed. A stage name 814 is an image indicating the current production stage name. A first reserved ball number 803 and a second reserved ball number 804 indicating the number of reserved balls are displayed on the right side of the screen.

FIG. 49 schematically shows a movable accessory in the thirteenth embodiment. The movable accessory 820 in this embodiment is an accessory having a predetermined shape that is movably provided in the vicinity of the effect display device 60 . The plurality of types of effects that can be executed by the effect control means 304 include a role-linked effect that moves the movable accessory 820 along with the display of the effect image. The movable accessory 820 has the shape of a motif related to the content of the presentation displayed on the screen of the presentation display device 60 in the presentation linked to the presentation, and is interlocked with the presentation to form a presentation with a consistent theme. be. The housing of the movable accessory 820 is molded with a transparent resin material such as acrylic resin, and an LED 835 is installed as a light emitting means inside. The LED 835 emits light in various colors, and an effect is executed based on a light emission pattern in which the process of lighting and extinguishing and switching the light emission color is defined. The movable accessory 820 moves vertically along a predetermined trajectory by means of a stepping motor and a predetermined drive connection mechanism (for example, endless belt, rack and pinion, etc.), and its movement and light emission of the LED 835 are controlled by the effect control means 304. .

FIG. 49(a) shows the initial state of the movable accessory 820, and FIG. 49(b) shows the completed state of the development operation of the movable accessory 820. FIG. The illustrated effect display device 60 schematically shows a state in which it is removed from the game board 80 . The movable accessory 820 is housed at a predetermined initial position around the screen of the effect display device 60 (under the screen of the effect display device 60 in the example of FIG. 49(a)). The movable accessory 820 is ejected from the storage position, which is the initial position, at the time of a predetermined performance (for example, at the time of the performance linked to the role), and is capable of performing a performance operation involving vertical movement in a predetermined area in front of the performance display device 60. be. The movable accessory 820 that has been ejected from the initial position below the screen of the effect display device 60 and has reached the uppermost end of the movable range is in a state where the effect operation is completed as shown in FIG. 49(b). In the production operation state of the movable accessory 820, the following visual effect image 941 is added to the position overlapping the movable accessory 820 so that the following visual effect image 941 with a flame motif is displayed as the background of the movable accessory 820. to display. The following visual effect image 941 is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 60 in the vicinity of the moving movable accessory 820 in front of the screen or at a position interlocking with the movement of the movable accessory 820 so as to overlap. It is a decorative image that helps highlight the movement and the movable accessory 820 itself. Also, a background visual effect image 942 is added as the background of the entire screen and displayed. The illustrated background visual effect image 942 is, for example, an image in which a plurality of lines, such as the seven colors of a rainbow, are arranged over the entire screen, moved in a certain direction, or changed in color.

After that, when the return operation is started at a predetermined timing, it moves downward toward the initial position again and returns to the initial state as shown in FIG. 49(a). 49(a) and 49(b), in the initial state and the development operation completion state, the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 at the lower left corner of the screen of the production display device 60 are made visible by the movable accessory 820. unhindered. The main body of the movable accessory 820 is supported by a left side support section 821 and a right side support section 822 provided on the left and right sides, and a left lower support section 823 and a lower right support section 824 provided below.

A left side rail 831 and a right side rail 832 are laid on the left and right sides of the screen of the effect display device 60 so as to form a track in the vertical direction, and a pair of left and right lower rails 833 are provided below the screen of the effect display device 60. and lower right rail 834 are laid so as to form a track in the vertical direction. The left side support portion 821 moves up and down along the left side rail 831 , and the right side support portion 822 moves up and down along the right side rail 832 . The lower left support portion 823 moves up and down along the lower left rail 833 , and the lower right support portion 824 moves up and down along the lower right rail 834 . The main body and four supporting parts of the movable accessory 820 are driven upward from the initial position below the screen of the effect display device 60, moved to the upper part of the screen of the effect display device 60, and then driven downward toward the initial position again. be. As shown in FIG. 49(a), in the initial state, the movable accessory 820 is folded so that the main body, the lower left support portion 823, and the lower right support portion 824 are overlapped, and stored in the initial position in a compact state. . The movable accessory 820 is unfolded as it moves upward from the folded state in the initial state to the state shown in FIG. 49(b). An upper accessory 840 is provided above the screen of the effect display device 60, and when the movable accessory 820 is fully developed as shown in FIG. A state as if 840 is stuck is expressed. For example, it is possible to construct an effect in which a movable accessory 820 having a shape with a motif of a sword or a knife pierces an upper accessory 840 with a motif representing an enemy character. The upper accessory 840 may be configured as a movable accessory. In that case, the upper accessory 840 may perform an effect action such as vibrating vertically and horizontally, or may descend to the approximate center position of the effect display device 60 to move the sword or blade. The movable accessory 820 used as a motif may be constructed so as to be pierced through the main body (penetration motion pattern).

FIG. 50 shows a state in which the movable accessory 820 moves between the initial state and the development completion state of the effect action. The movable accessory 820 can reduce the visibility of at least one of the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 displayed on the production display device 60 at least in the action of returning from the state of the production action to the initial state. It operates on a predetermined orbit. The movable accessory 820 reduces the visibility of at least one of the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 displayed on the production display device 60 even in the movement operation from the initial state to the production operation state. can operate on a predetermined trajectory. During such vertical movement, one of the left side support portion 821 and the right side support portion 822 that support the main body of the movable accessory 820 crosses the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 so as to overlap. , there is a risk of obstructing the visual recognition of the first alternative symbol 801 or the second alternative symbol 802 that is stopped and displayed. Among the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802, even if the visibility of the alternative pattern corresponding to the main decorative pattern 800 is hindered, there is no problem as long as the main decorative pattern 800 is displayed. Alternative symbols corresponding to special symbols that do not exist are not preferable because if the visibility is hindered, the player loses the ability to clearly indicate the winning or losing result to the player, and there is a particularly high need to ensure the visibility. Here, the visibility of the first alternative pattern 801 or the second alternative pattern 802 can be reduced not only when the first alternative pattern 801 or the second alternative pattern 802 is completely covered, but also when the first alternative pattern 801 or the second alternative pattern 802 When overlapping so as to cover at least part of the pattern 801 or the second alternative pattern 802, or when not overlapping with the first alternative pattern 801 or the second alternative pattern 802, but not overlapping with the light emitting part provided in the movable accessory 820, When the visibility is lowered by being in the shadow of the movable accessory 820, or when the substitute symbol overlaps partly or entirely with the movable accessory 820 during a part of the period of the stationary display period, the entire period of the stationary display period may include a wide range of aspects in which is not visible. It should be noted that, in normal variable effects (for example, effects excluding exceptions such as look-ahead effects that are executed across multiple fluctuations and changes in the initial position of movable roles in specific production modes), it is mainly Since the movement of the movable accessory (movable accessory 820) is completed within the variable display period of the special symbol, the alternative symbol corresponding to the main special symbol does not perform an exceptional operation. As long as you don't do that, there is almost no risk that the visibility will decrease in normal variable production.

FIG. 50(a) shows the state immediately after the movable accessory 820 starts operating from the initial state, and although the left side support part 821 of the movable accessory 820 overlaps a part of the second alternative pattern 802, the first alternative pattern 801 is shown. And the second alternative pattern 802 has not reached a state where it cannot be visually recognized. FIG. 50(b) shows a state in which the left side support portion 821 of the movable accessory 820 is passing along a trajectory that overlaps the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802. FIG. In this state, most of the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 are covered to prevent visual recognition of the patterns. On the way from the initial state to the upper end where the development operation of the movable accessory 820 is completed, and on the way from the development operation completion state to the initial state, the trajectory overlaps with the alternative symbol as shown in FIG. 50(b). pass through

In the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control means 304 controls the movable accessory 820 as follows, so that the visibility of the first alternative symbol 801 or the second alternative symbol 802 in the stop display is not lowered. A description will be given of the performance linked to the first special symbol 51 during the performance corresponding to the first special symbol 51 in the game state in which the variation of the first special symbol 51 is the main subject. In that case, the movement of the movable accessory 820 is regulated when the second alternative symbol 802 corresponding to the second special symbol 52 that is not the subject is displayed in a stopped state. If the movable accessory 820 is in the initial position a predetermined time before the stop display timing of the second alternative symbol 802, the effect control means 304 regulates the movement start of the movable accessory 820, which is the same as in the sixth embodiment. Common.

The effect control means 304 starts the movable accessory from a predetermined period before the second alternative pattern 802 (the first alternative pattern 801 when the first special pattern 51 is the special pattern that is not the subject) of the special pattern that is not the subject is stopped and displayed. , and after the stop display period of the second alternative symbol 802 has elapsed, the return operation of the movable accessory is executed. For example, when the stop display period of the second alternative symbol 802 is 0.5 seconds, "after the stop display period has elapsed" may be the timing after 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the stop display. Thereby, the visibility of the second alternative pattern 802 can be ensured. The regulation referred to here is, for example, by suspending the movement of the movable accessory 820 so that the movable accessory 820 does not overlap the second alternative symbol 802 during the stop display period of the second alternative symbol 802. may Alternatively, another action may be substituted so as not to cross the area overlapping the second alternative pattern 802 . As another operation, for example, control such as reciprocating in a short section in front of the area overlapping the second alternative symbol 802 and waiting, or stopping the second alternative symbol 802 by adjusting the speed of the operation of the movable accessory 820 The control may be such that the area is not crossed during the display period, or the control is such that the symbol is retracted to another retracted position that does not overlap the second alternative symbol 802 . Alternatively, the control may be such that the movable accessory 820 is moved to the initial position in advance so as not to overlap the second alternative symbol 802 during the stop display period of the second alternative symbol 802 . In that case, the predetermined period before the second alternative symbol 802 is stopped and displayed is the return operation, which is the operation of returning the movable accessory 820 in the state of completion of the development operation to the initial state (that is, storing it in the initial position). It may mean earlier than necessary time. For example, when the time required for the return operation is less than 1 second, the design is designed to have a margin in consideration of malfunctions due to stepping out of the stepping motor, which is the driving means, and the stop display of the second alternative symbol 802 is about 1 second. From two seconds before, the return motion of the movable accessory 820 may be restricted from moving along a predetermined trajectory. It should be noted that the stop of the second alternative symbol 802, which triggers the execution of the control for regulating the movement of the movable accessory 820, is variably displayed as the main special symbol among the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. At least the alternative design corresponding to the special design that is not the subject (special design that is not the main subject) is targeted, and the stop of the alternative design corresponding to the special design that is the subject may or may not be the target. As a modified example of the movable accessory 820, when adopting a movable accessory that transforms after moving to the deployment completion position, instead of an accessory that only moves up and down in a reciprocating manner, it is necessary to temporarily change the shape in order to avoid failure. It is preferable to perform a return operation such as returning to the initial position after canceling and returning to the original deployed position, or performing the effect operation in the opposite direction.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing the relationship between the performance operation start timing of the movable accessory 820 and the stop period of the second special symbol 52 . In this figure, a case will be described in which it is necessary to restrict the movement of the movable accessory 820 before it starts its performance action. FIG. 51(a) shows the timing of the original performance linked to the character in the normal time. The first period 850 is the fluctuation period of the first special symbol 51 . The movable accessory 820 starts to operate at the timing t1 in the first period 850, and the second period 851 after the timing t1 in the first period 850 is the original production operation period of the movable accessory 820. The first period 850 is, for example, a winning variation effect in which a big win occurs, and in that case, the appearance of the movable accessory 820 suggests the occurrence of a big win. In addition, during the second period 851 (the same applies to the fourth period 853 and the ninth period 858, which will be described later), which indicates the performance operation period of the illustrated movable accessory 820, the movable accessory 820 retreats to the initial position for convenience. is completed, the main decorative pattern 800 is stopped and displayed in a manner to notify a big win, or an effect (occurrence of a high base state, etc.) is executed to notify the occurrence of an advantageous situation to the player. It also includes time. In addition, in the case where a promotion effect or the like in which the main decorative pattern 800 changes to a more advantageous mode is added, the second period 851 shares the final period with the first period 850 indicating the fluctuation period of the first special pattern 51. Instead, the end of the first period 850 may be set after the end of the second period 851 (similarly, only the operation period of the movable accessory 820 is set as the second period 851, and the main decoration The period during which the pattern 800 is stopped and displayed may be an effect after the end of the second period 851, and may be configured to continue until the end of the first period 850).

FIG. 51(b) shows the timing of the effect in the variation of the first special symbol 51 in the low probability low base state 620 in the upper stage, and the timing of the effect in the variation of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state 620 in the lower stage. indicate timing. A third period 852 is a period during which the first special symbol 51 fluctuates, and a fourth period 853 after timing t1 in the third period 852 is the same as the second period 851 in FIG. This is the performance operation period of . A fifth period 854 is a fluctuation period of the second special symbol 52, and is extremely long, for example, 10 minutes (only part of it is shown in this figure for convenience). The sixth period 855 after the timing t3 in the fifth period 854 indicates the fluctuation stop period of the second special symbol 52 . In this embodiment, a sixth period 855 from timing t2 to timing t3, which is a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the symbol fluctuation stop start timing t3 in the fifth period 854, and from stop start timing t3 to stop end timing t4. The seventh period 856 of is set as the regulation period of the performance action of the movable accessory 820 . Since the original operation start timing t1 of the movable accessory 820 is included in the sixth period 855, that is, it is included in the regulation period from when the second special symbol 52 starts to stop until a predetermined period of time before, as shown in FIG. In the example, the action of the movable accessory 820 is not started, and in the fourth period 853 the movable accessory 820 is not operated and the presentation other than the movable accessory 820 is executed.

FIG. 51(c) shows the timing of the effect in the variation of the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the main special symbol in the high probability high base state 624 in the upper stage, and the first in the high probability high base state 624 in the lower stage. The timing of the production in the variation of the special symbol 51 is shown. The eighth period 857 is the period during which the second special symbol 52 fluctuates, and the ninth period 858 after the timing t1 in the eighth period 857 is the same as the second period 851 in FIG. This is the performance operation period of . A 10th period 859 is a fluctuation period of the first special symbol 51, and a twelfth period 861 after timing t3 in the 10th period 859 indicates a fluctuation stop period of the first special symbol 51. In this embodiment, the eleventh period 860 from the timing t2 to the timing t3, which is a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) from the symbol variation stop start timing t3 in the tenth period 859, and the stop start timing t3 to the stop end timing t4. The twelfth period 861 is set as a regulation period for the performance action of the movable accessory 820 . In addition, in the high probability high base state 624, the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51 is set to a time substantially equal to the 11th period 860 (for example, about 2 seconds). The original operation start timing t1 of the movable accessory 820 is included in the 11th period 860, that is, included in the regulation period from the start of stop of the first special symbol 51 corresponding to the non-main special symbol until a predetermined time before. Therefore, the action of the movable accessory 820 is not started even in the example of FIG. In other words, in the high-probability high-base state 624, the fluctuation start timing of the first special symbol 51 corresponding to the main special symbol is configured to coincide with the start timing of the regulation period of the movable accessory 820. Therefore, in the high base state, unlike in the normal game state, there is no need for timing processing for determining when the variable display corresponding to the special symbol that is not the subject of the game ends. The movement of the movable accessory 820 is regulated on the occasion of receiving the start command of the variable display of the first special symbol 51 which is the special symbol which does not become the main part of the game, and the command regarding the expiration of the twelfth period 861 which is the stop display period. is received (or when the effect control means 304 determines that the twelfth period 861, which is the stop display period, has expired), the movable accessory 820 may be permitted to operate (at this time, the first When the special symbol 51 is suspended, the control period of the performance operation occurs continuously, so it may be configured not to permit the start of the performance operation of the movable accessory 820) .

FIG. 52 is a time chart showing the relationship between the return operation timing of the movable accessory 820 and the stop period of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state 620. FIG. In this figure, the case where it is necessary to restrict the movement after the movable accessory 820 has already started the performance movement will be described. FIG. 52(a) shows the return operation start timing and return operation period of the movable accessory 820 in the original accessory-linked production at normal time. A thirteenth period 862 is an operation period of the movable accessory 820 . A 14th period 863 of the 13th period 862 is a period in which the movable accessory 820 is in an effect operation state, and a final 15th period 864 starting from timing t1 is a return operation period. The recovery operation period is, for example, a little less than 1 second when the movable accessory 820 is normally operated without an operation abnormality such as a stepping motor out of step.

In FIG. 52(b), the upper stage shows the return operation period of the movable accessory 820 in the variation of the first special symbol 51, and the lower stage shows the stop period of the variation effect of the second special symbol 52. FIG. A 16th period 865 is a performance operation period of the movable accessory 820 . The twentieth period 869 is a fluctuation period of the second special symbol 52 in the low-probability low-base state 620, and is extremely long, for example, 10 minutes (only part of it is shown in this figure for convenience). The 22nd period 871 after the timing t4 in the 20th period 869 shows the fluctuation stop period of the 2nd special design 52. In this embodiment, a 21st period 870 from timing t3 to timing t4, which is a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the symbol fluctuation stop start timing t4 in the twentieth period 869, and from stop start timing t4 to stop end timing t5. The 22nd period 871 of is set as the regulation period of the return operation of the movable accessory 820 . The start timing t1 of the return action (fifteenth period 864) of the original movable accessory 820 is included in the twenty-first period 870, that is, included in the regulation period from the start of stop of the second special symbol 52 to a predetermined time before. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 52(b), the return operation of the movable accessory 820 (the fifteenth period 864) does not start at the timing of t1. The return operation (15th period 864) of the movable accessory 820 is delayed from the stop start timing t4 of the second special symbol 52 to the timing t2 after the stop period has passed, and executed in the 19th period 868. The timing t2 is almost the same timing as the stop end timing t5 of the second special symbol 52. - 特許庁An eighteenth period 867 from the original recovery operation start timing t1 to timing t2 indicates a delay period of the recovery operation, and a nineteenth period 868 from timing t2 indicates a recovery operation period after the delay processing.

In addition, in the 23rd period 872 after the stop of the second special symbol 52, if there is a next hold of the second special symbol 52, there is a possibility that the next symbol variation will be started. In the pachinko game machine 100, the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 in the normal game state (low probability low base state 620) is removed, and the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is performed during the symbol variation period regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. Since it is longer than the period, even if the return action of the movable accessory 820 is executed from the timing t2, it does not overlap with the stop period of the second special symbol 52.例文帳に追加

The example of FIG. 52(c) shows a case where the return operation start timing t1 of the movable accessory 820 is earlier than the timing t3. The upper 24th period 873 indicates the fluctuation period of the first special symbol 51 in the low probability low base state 620, and the lower 26th period 875 indicates the fluctuation period of the second special symbol 52 in the low probability low base state 620. show. In the 24th period 873, the 15th period 864 from the timing t1 indicates the return operation period of the original movable accessory 820. FIG. A 27th period 876 from a timing t3 to a timing t4, which is a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the stop start timing t4 of the pattern fluctuation in the 26th period 875, and a 28th period 877 from the stop start timing t4 to the stop end timing t5. is defined as a regulation period for the return action of the movable accessory 820 . When the 27th period 876 and the 28th period 877 include the return operation start timing t1 of the movable accessory 820, the start of the return operation is delayed as in the example of FIG. 52(b), but FIG. 52(c). When the return operation start timing t1 is earlier than the timing t3, the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is started. As a result, the twenty-fifth period 874, which is the return operation period of the movable accessory 820, partially overlaps with the twenty-seventh period 876, but since the twenty-fifth period 874 is shorter than the twenty-seventh period 876, the twenty-fifth period 874 is the twenty-eighth period. It does not overlap with 877 , and the returning motion of the movable accessory 820 does not hinder the visibility of the second alternative symbol 802 . Further, when the lottery result of the second special symbol 52 is a small hit, there is a period after the timing t5 during which the action of the big winning opening 20 based on the small win is performed. Since the second alternative symbol 802 corresponding to the second special symbol 52, which is the special symbol 52 that is not set, is not switched from the variable display to the stop display, the return operation of the movable accessory 820 can be executed during the execution of the small winning. and

FIG. 53 shows the return operation timing of the movable accessory 820 in the high probability high base state 624, the fluctuation/stop period of the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the main special symbol, and the first special corresponding to the non-main special symbol. It is a time chart which shows the relationship of the fluctuation|variation / stop period of the pattern 51. FIG. FIG. 53(a) shows the original return operation start timing and return operation period of the movable accessory 820 in the normal role-linked production. A twenty-ninth period 878 is an operation period of the movable accessory 820 . Of the twenty-ninth period 878, the thirtieth period 879 is the period during which the movable accessory 820 is in the effect operation state, and the final forty-first period 880 starting at timing t1 is the return operation period. The recovery operation period is, for example, less than 1 second.

FIG. 53(b) shows the movement of the movable accessory 820 in the variation of the second special symbol 52 in the upper part, and the variation display period of the first special symbol 51 when the first special symbol 51 has no remaining hold and the lower part. Indicates the suspension period. A 42nd period 881 is a performance operation period of the movable accessory 820 . The forty-sixth period 885 is a fluctuation period of the first special symbol 51, and is a period of about 2.5 seconds including the fluctuation display time of two seconds, for example. The 48th period 887 after the timing t4 in the 46th period 885 indicates the fluctuation stop period of the first special symbol 51 . In this embodiment, the 47th period 886 (high probability high base of the first special symbol 51) from the timing t3 to the timing t4, which is a predetermined time (2 seconds) before the timing t4 of the symbol fluctuation stop start timing 885 in the 46th period 885 The variable display period in the state 624) and the 48th period 887 from the stop start timing t4 to the stop end timing t5 are set as the regulation period of the return operation of the movable accessory 820. In the example of FIG. 53(b), the start timing t1 of the return action (41st period 880) of the original movable accessory 820 is included in the 47th period 886, that is, a predetermined time before the stop start of the first special symbol 51. 53(b), the return operation of the movable accessory 820 (the 41st period 880) does not start at the timing t1. The return operation (41st period 880) of the movable accessory 820 is delayed from the stop start timing t4 of the first special symbol 51 to the timing t2 after the stop period has passed, and executed in the 45th period 884. The timing t2 is almost the same timing as the stop end timing t5 of the first special symbol 51. - 特許庁A forty-fourth period 883 from the original recovery operation start timing t1 to timing t2 indicates a delay period of the recovery operation, and a forty-fifth period 884 from timing t2 indicates a recovery operation period.

FIG. 53(c) shows the stop period of the first special symbol 51 when the first special symbol 51 is still reserved. The return operation of the movable accessory 820 in the second special symbol 52 in this case is the same as that shown in the upper part of FIG. A forty-ninth period 888 is a fluctuation period of the first special symbol 51, and is, for example, two seconds. A fifty-first period 890 after timing t4 in the forty-ninth period 888 indicates a fluctuation stop period of the second special symbol 52 . A 50th period 889 from a timing t3 to a timing t4, which is a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the stop start timing t4 of the pattern fluctuation in the 49th period 888, and a 51st period 890 from the stop start timing t4 to the stop end timing t5. is defined as a regulation period for the return action of the movable accessory 820 . Since the start timing t1 of the return operation (41st period 880) of the original movable accessory 820 is included in the 50th period 889, that is, the regulation period from the start of stop of the second special symbol 52 to a predetermined time before, As in the upper stage of 53(b), the return operation of the movable accessory 820 (the 41st period 880) does not start at the timing of t1. The return operation (41st period 880) of the movable accessory 820 is delayed from the stop start timing t4 of the first special symbol 51 to the timing t2 (t5) after the stop period has passed, and executed in the 45th period 884. After the fifty-first period 890 has passed, the first special symbol 51 is pending, so the next symbol variation is displayed in the fifty-second period 891 . In this case, the 54th period 893 after the timing t6 indicates the fluctuation stop period of the first special symbol 51, and the 53rd period 892 from the timing t5 to the timing t6, which is a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the stop start timing t6. , the fifty-fourth period 893 from the stop start timing t6 to the stop end timing t7 is set as a regulation period for the return operation of the movable accessory 820, which is necessary to prevent the visibility of the first alternative symbol 801 from decreasing. Become. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is delayed by the variable display of the first special symbol 51 once, the next variable display of the first special symbol 51 is delayed. The timing is configured so as not to cause delay processing, and configured to forcibly execute the return operation of the movable accessory 820 . That is, the 45th period 884 in the upper part of FIG. 53(b) overlaps with the 53rd period 892, but when the variable display of the first special symbol 51 occurs continuously, the first alternative symbol related to the first special symbol 51 The return operation may be started exceptionally regardless of the decrease in visibility of 801 . The reason for adopting this control is that in the high-probability high base state 624, the situation in which the movable accessory 820 operates as a variable performance accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol 52 is the same as in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment. This is because, except for exceptional effects, it is determined when the result of the winning lottery of the second special symbol 52 is a big hit or when a high-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, when the second special symbol 52 is a big win, the variable display of the first special symbol 51 is forcibly missed and stopped when the second special symbol 52 is stopped and displayed. This is because there is no possibility that the first special symbol 51 will win, and the big win will start after the second special symbol 52 is stopped and displayed. Moreover, it is because it is necessary to ensure the visibility of the result of the important success/failure determination when the high-expectation reach is executed. By setting the delay processing to a maximum of one time, the performance operation (including the return operation) of the movable accessory 820 in the variable performance of the big win is prevented from increasing the sense of incompatibility of the performance, and the big win performance and the important high expectation are prevented. Notification of the result of determination of suitability of reach fluctuation can prevent deterioration of visibility by delaying the return operation of the movable accessory 820

The example of FIG. 53(d) shows a case where the return operation start timing t1 of the movable accessory 820 is earlier than the timing t3. The fifty-fifth period 894 in the upper stage indicates the return operation period of the movable accessory 820 in the variation of the second special symbol 52 , and the fifty-eighth period 897 in the lower stage indicates the variation period of the first special symbol 51 . A 59th period 898 from timing t3 to timing t4, which is a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the stop start timing t4 of the pattern fluctuation in the 58th period 897, and a 60th period 899 from the stop start timing t4 to the stop end timing t5. is defined as a regulation period for the return action of the movable accessory 820 . When the 59th period 898 and the 60th period 899 include the return operation start timing t1 of the movable accessory 820, the start of the return operation is delayed as in the example of FIG. 53(b), but FIG. 53(d) When the return operation start timing t1 is earlier than the timing t3, the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is started. As a result, the fifty-seventh period 896, which is the return operation period of the movable accessory 820, partially overlaps with the fifty-ninth period 898, but since the fifty-seventh period 896 is shorter than the fifty-ninth period 898, the fifty-seventh period 896 is the sixtieth period. 899 does not overlap, and the return motion of the movable accessory 820 does not hinder the visibility of the second alternative symbol 802 .

(2) The effect control means 304 reduces the visibility of the special effect of the movable role upon receiving the information indicating the start of the pattern variation based on the specific variation pattern associated with the predetermined special effect. Control so that the movement to get is regulated. The predetermined special effect referred to here is, for example, an effect for notifying the occurrence of a big hit when it occurs. In particular, in a high base state such as the high-probability high base state 624, when the character interlocking production is executed during the fluctuation of the main special pattern, a big hit occurs accidentally in the fluctuation of the special pattern that is not the main. In the case of a big win, the so-called V area (specific A special effect in which words that encourage hitting a ball aimed at the area) is displayed in a large size on the screen is displayed by forced interruption. For example, in the high-probability high base state 624, originally, the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52 is the main subject, and the player hits the ball aiming at the second start opening 12, and the first special pattern 51 is not the main subject. Although the big hit of the first special symbol 51 is hard to occur, it rarely happens that the ball accidentally enters the first starting port 11 and the big hit of the first special symbol 51 occurs. In that case, the special effect corresponding to the big hit variation of the first special symbol 51 is forcibly interrupted in the character interlocking effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol 52.例文帳に追加Therefore, the movement of the movable accessory 820 is regulated so that the movable accessory 820 does not hinder the visibility of important information displayed in such a special effect.

In addition, as a modification of the board surface configuration of the game board 80, the normal electric accessory 90 is provided at the first start port 11 instead of the second start port 12, and the right side of the game board 80 (the second start port 12 in FIG. 30) position), and by arranging the second starting port 12 in which the normal electric accessory 90 is not provided downstream of the first starting port 11 on the right side of the game board 80, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded. It may be made difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12 while the game ball is being held. In this case, in the high-probability high-base state 624 and the low-probability high-base state 622, it is difficult to make the ball enter the second starting port 12 and acquire the ball with the small hit of the second special symbol 52, and the game board. Most of the game balls launched to the right side of 80 enter the expanded first starting port 11.例文帳に追加Conversely, in the high-probability low base state 626, the normal electric accessory 90 is configured to be difficult to expand (or not to expand), making it easier for the ball to enter the second start hole 12 and the big winning hole 20, and the small It becomes easy to obtain the ball by winning.

FIG. 54 shows the relationship between the operation period of the movable accessory 820 and the symbol variation period during which special effects occur. When the execution of the character interlocking production is determined in response to the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52, which is the subject, and the special performance occurs in response to the pattern variation of the first special pattern 51, which is not the subject, as follows. By regulating the street, the deterioration of the visibility of information necessary for the player is prevented.

(a) If the movable accessory 820 is still in the initial state when the first special symbol 51 starts to change the jackpot symbol, the start of the performance operation of the movable accessory 820 is regulated. That is, the movable accessory 820 is not started (cancelled), and the movable accessory 820 is not operated in the symbol variation effect. In FIG. 54(a), the upper 61st period 920 shows the pattern fluctuation period of the 2nd special pattern 52, and the lower 63rd period 922 shows the big hit pattern fluctuation period of the 1st special pattern 51 that triggers the occurrence of the special effect. show. In the 61st period 920, the character-linked production is originally executed in the 62nd period 921 from the timing t1. However, the 63rd period 922 is started at the timing t2 earlier than the timing t1, and the special effect is displayed in the 64th period 923 included in the 63rd period 922. Since the role 820 is still in the initial state, the rendering of the movable role 820 in the 62nd period 921 is canceled, and the movable role 820 does not operate in the 62nd period 921 .

(b) When the first special symbol 51 starts to change the jackpot symbol, the movable role 820 corresponds to a variable display in which a role interlocking effect such as high-expectation reach is executed as a variable effect of the second special symbol 52, for example. If it is not already in the initial state, that is, if it is in the performance operation state, the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is immediately started due to the execution of the variable performance. In FIG. 54(b), the 65th period 924 in the upper row indicates the pattern fluctuation period of the second special pattern 52, and the 69th period 928 in the lower row indicates the jackpot pattern fluctuation period of the first special pattern 51 that triggers the occurrence of the special effect. show. In the 65th period 924, the performance linked with the character is started from the timing t3. However, the 69th period 928 starts at the timing t4 after the timing t3, and the special effect is displayed in the 70th period 929 included in the 69th period 928, and the 69th period 928 starts at the timing t4. Since the movable accessory 820 is already in the performance operation state, the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is immediately executed in the 67th period 926 . As a result, the character-linked production is substantially executed only during the 66th period 925 from timing t3 to before the start of the 67th period 926, and is executed as a variable production corresponding to the second special symbol 52 in the 67th period 926. The character interlocking effect that is in the 68th period 927 is faded out, the effect corresponding to the second special pattern 52 (variable display of the main decorative pattern 800) is not executed, and the special effect of the 70th period 929 (first special pattern 51 is the main decorative pattern 800).

FIG. 55 schematically shows a screen transition from an effect being executed to a special effect. FIG. 55(a) shows the execution of the effect corresponding to the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52, which is the subject in the 65th period 924. FIG. At the timing t4, the big hit variation of the first special symbol 51 which is not the subject is started, and the effect is faded out as shown in FIG. 55(b). After a darkened screen as shown in FIG. 55(c) is displayed for a while, at the start timing of the 64th period 923 (70th period 929), it switches to a special effect screen as shown in FIG. ” is displayed, and an effect corresponding to the big hit symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 is displayed.

The “predetermined special effect” may be, for example, a display indicating a predetermined state transition or a display indicating a predetermined game result, and may not be a variable effect in the high probability high base state 624 . For example, when the display indicating the predetermined state transition is controlled to the low-probability low-base state 620, the special pattern reaches the upper limit number of fluctuation display times without a big hit from the previous big win (or RAM clear). It is an effect that notifies the transition of the game state when the easy ball entry state (high base state) is to start. The movement of the movable accessory 820 is restricted so as not to reduce the visibility of such notification. In addition, the display indicating the predetermined state transition is, for example, a shooting direction instruction image 812 in FIG. It is also possible to display For example, when the upper limit number of symbol variations in the low base state is reached due to the variation that causes the movable accessory 820 to operate, and the special easy-to-enter state starts, the easy-to-enter state is started when the special symbol variation starts. The state starts and the hit-to-right display begins. In order to prevent the player from overlooking such a right-handed display, the movement of the movable accessory 820 is restricted so as not to reduce the visibility of the right-handed display. Further, the display showing the predetermined game result is, for example, a result display showing the number of consecutive times of the easy-ball-entering state and the number of winning balls during that period as the game result when the easy-ball-entering state ends. In the event that execution of a role-linked effect is determined in response to the pattern variation of one of the main special symbols, and a special effect occurs in response to the pattern variation of the other special symbol that is not the subject, the following Regulate as follows.

(a) If the movable accessory 820 is still in the initial state at the start of the predetermined special effect, the start of the effect operation of the movable accessory 820 is regulated.
(b) If the movable accessory 820 is not already in the initial state at the start of the predetermined special effect, that is, if it is in the effect operation state, the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is immediately started. This prevents deterioration of the visibility of information necessary for the player.

As a modified example of the movable accessory 820, if a movable accessory that transforms after moving to the performance action position is adopted instead of the accessory that only moves up and down, the movable accessory will perform the performance operation. It is unclear to what extent it is being executed, and in order to avoid failures due to unintended actions caused by moving the deformed movable accessory in the direction of the initial position, the production action is once performed as a production action. After moving to the position and executing the transformation (development) operation, cancel the transformation and return to the original production operation position, then execute the return operation to return to the initial position, or execute the production operation in the opposite direction. It is preferable to perform a return operation such as

(3) The production control means 304 controls the display of the production image, the operation of the movable accessory 820, and the light emission of the light emitting means when executing the role-linked production. The light emitting means is, for example, an LED 835 installed inside the movable accessory 820 . The LED 835 can emit light in a plurality of colors, and the effect control means 304 controls the light emission of the LED 835 based on a light emission control pattern in which the process of lighting, extinguishing, and switching the light emission color is defined. The process of controlling the LED 835 defined as the light emission control pattern includes at least a portion of a loop pattern that repeatedly executes a specific control pattern. In particular, the loop pattern is set as data (data at the end of the performance operation) that repeats during the performance period in which the movable accessory 820 is maintained at the performance operation position until the return operation is instructed.

The effect control means 304 regulates the return motion of the movable accessory 820, which may reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern, on a predetermined trajectory when predetermined conditions are satisfied in the accessory-linked effect. The “predetermined condition” referred to here is a condition for generating a possibility that the movable accessory 820 overlaps with the predetermined information displayed on the screen in the performance operation state of the movable accessory 820 . For example, as shown in FIGS. 52(b) and (c) of (1), even if there is a possibility that the timing of the return action of the movable accessory 820 may overlap with the stoppage of the variation of the alternative symbol corresponding to the special symbol that is not the subject. good. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(b) of (2), the condition may be that there is a possibility that the timing of the return action of the movable accessory 820 overlaps with a special effect corresponding to a special symbol that is not the subject.

The effect control means 304 can continue execution of the loop processing in the light emission control pattern while regulating the return operation on the predetermined trajectory of the movable accessory 820 . As a result, even if the return operation on the predetermined trajectory of the movable accessory 820 is restricted and the return operation from the state of the effect operation to the initial state is delayed, the loop pattern of the light emission control is repeatedly executed. , making it easier for the player to visually grasp that the movable accessory 820 is in a controlled state rather than having a failure or trouble and that the performance linked to the accessory is continuing, thereby reducing discomfort. A loop pattern of light emission control is defined to sequentially emit light from the LED 835 in seven colors or to repeatedly output a specific sound effect, and such a loop pattern is repeatedly executed many times. The loop pattern is continuously executed at least until the return motion of the movable accessory 820 is executed. In addition to providing a loop pattern, it is recommended to prepare light emission pattern data that has a series of data in which patterns for repeatedly executing the same data are continuously stored so that light emission can be performed for a sufficiently long period of time. However, the same countermeasure can be taken. However, since it is necessary to have a lot of useless light emission pattern data as data, it is less efficient than the case of controlling with loop pattern data.

56 is a time chart illustrating the relationship between the operation of the movable accessory 820 and the control of the LED 835. FIG. The upper part of FIG. 56(a) shows the operation of the movable accessory 820 at normal time, and the lower part shows the light emission control pattern of the LED 835. As shown in FIG. The 71st period 930 is the action period of the movable accessory 820, similar to the 13th period 862 in FIG. 52(a), the 72nd period 931 is the performance action period, and the 73rd period 932 is the return action period. The illustrated emission control pattern consists of a non-loop pattern 900 and a loop pattern 901 . The non-loop pattern 900 is a control pattern longer than the loop pattern 901, in which the pattern of switching the emission color and lighting and extinguishing is determined for the purpose of directing the appearance of the movable role 820 in the role-linked production. The loop pattern 901 is a short-unit control pattern configured on the premise of repeated execution, and is repeatedly executed a plurality of times after the control based on the non-loop pattern 900 until the performance linked to the character is completed. It should be noted that different light emission control patterns may be output for the effect operation period of the 72nd period 931 and the return operation period of the 73rd period 932. During the period 932 (the same applies to a seventy-seventh period 936 to be described later), a pattern with less conspicuous flickering and lower brightness than during the performance operation is set, or a light-off pattern in which no light is emitted at all is set. may

FIG. 56(b) exemplifies the relationship with the light emission control pattern of the LED 835 when the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is restricted and its execution is delayed. The upper part shows the operation of the movable accessory 820, and the lower part shows the light emission control pattern of the LED835. The 74th period 933 is the operation period of the movable accessory 820, similar to the 16th period 865 in FIG. 52(b). The return operation is delayed, and the return operation is performed in the seventy-seventh period 936 . The illustrated light emission control pattern is composed of a non-loop pattern 900 and a loop pattern 901 as in FIG. 56(a). After the non-loop pattern 900, the loop pattern 901 is repeatedly executed. continues to emit light. The non-loop pattern 900 is repeatedly performed until the return operation delayed by the seventy-sixth period 935 is performed in the seventy-seventh period 936 . As a result, even if the operation of the movable accessory 820 is stopped, the LED 835 continues to light up, making it difficult to see that a failure or malfunction has occurred, and discomfort can be reduced.

If an error occurs during the light emission of the loop pattern 901, and a higher priority light emission data (e.g., red light emission for notifying an error) is commanded by an interrupt, the light emission data is switched to the higher priority light emission data. be done. Further, even after the interrupted light emission due to an error or the like is cancelled, the control by the loop pattern 901 is resumed if the return operation is delayed.

In addition, the movable accessory 820 of the thirteenth embodiment may perform an action pattern involving vertical movement of the upper accessory 840, such as the above-described "piercing action pattern". (and effect action), the visibility of the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 is not affected, so the return action of the movable accessory 820 even when the "penetration action pattern" is executed Even when the delay processing is being performed, the upper accessory 840 is first returned to the initial position.

However, when the returning motion of the movable accessory 820 is delayed under the condition of executing the "penetration motion pattern", if only the upper accessory 840 returns, the game machine (movable accessory) is considered to the player. There is a risk of worrying about the failure of the game, and there is a risk of a decrease in the desire to play due to the recognition that the performance is not normal. Therefore, as a modification, even for the upper accessory 840 that does not affect the visibility of the alternative symbol, the returning action is delayed in accordance with the delay of the returning action of the movable accessory 820 that has performed the action ("penetrating action pattern") in conjunction. A delay and a continuation of the lighting effect (lighting based on the loop pattern) during the delay processing of the light emitting unit of the upper accessory 840 may be executed.

(4) There are a plurality of types of effects linked to the character object, one of which includes a continuous character object effect. The continuous role production is a production in which a movable role object is operated in accordance with the display of the production image, and the production image is continuously displayed over a plurality of variable production displays, and in the display of the production image, the movable role is displayed. This is an effect that can add a predetermined visual effect to the effect image in a form linked to the action of the object 820 . The visual effect here refers to a position linked with the movement of the movable accessory 820 so as to overlap the movable accessory 820 in motion in the front of the screen on the screen of the effect display device 60, or a position of the background. It is a decorative image that is displayed and useful for highlighting the movement of the movable accessory 820 and the movable accessory 820 itself. The visual effect images include a follow visual effect image 941 and a background visual effect image 942 . The following visual effect image 941 follows the movement of the movable accessory 820 and is displayed in the vicinity of or overlapping with it. The background visual effect image 942 is an image added as the background of the entire screen.

FIG. 57 schematically shows a movable role product and an alternative role product image. In the example of this figure, a left movable accessory 943 and a right movable accessory 944 that are a pair of left and right movable accessories are installed on both sides of the screen of the effect display device 60 . As shown in FIG. 57(a), the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 are moved from the left side of the screen and the right movable accessory 944 from the right side of the screen so as to protrude horizontally toward the center of the screen. While protruding the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944, or after protruding, the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 are vibrated.

The effect control means 304 changes the action mode and the visual effect mode of the movable accessory 820 each time the number of variable presentation displays is increased in the continuous accessory presentation. That is, the operation mode of the movable accessory 820, for example, the magnitude of vibration is gradually changed, the mode of visual effect is switched between blue, green, and red, or the size is changed to small, medium, or large. Changes such as switching between large and large are possible. For example, in the case of a continuous role performance that is executed over three variable performance displays, the first variable performance has a small shake, the second variable performance has a medium shake, and the third variable performance has a moderate shake. Make it vibrate with a big shake. A follow-up visual effect image 941 and a background visual effect image 942 are added to the background of the movable role or the background of the screen, and displayed, for example, in the case of a continuous role performance that is executed over three variable performance displays. The following visual effect image 941 or the background visual effect image 941 or the background visual effect image 941 is colored mainly in blue in the first variable effect, mainly in green in the second variable effect, and mainly in red in the third variable effect. An effect image 942 is displayed. The LEDs incorporated in the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 may emit light with the same color as the main color. "Multiple times of fluctuation production display" may be a continuous production corresponding to multiple times of continuous special symbol fluctuation, or a pseudo multiple times of continuous fluctuation production in one special symbol fluctuation period may be

In the continuous role performance, it is possible to provide a performance in which the action mode of the movable role and the mode of the visual effect change each time, and the degree of expectation for the big win gradually increases. On the other hand, as shown in the figure, when the left movable role 943 of the left movable role 943 and the right movable role 944 appears, there is a possibility that the visibility of the first alternative pattern 801 and the second alternative pattern 802 may be lowered. be. Therefore, the production control means 304 can regulate the movement of the movable role in the continuous role production in a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the alternative pattern as the non-main decorative pattern, while adding visual effects and At least one of the display of the substitute character product image, which is an image having an appearance that can visually substitute for the movable character product 820, is performed. In a continuous role production, the meaning of the production is that the action mode of the movable role and the form of the visual effect change and develop each time. Resulting in. In particular, if the need for regulation is found at the start of the continuous role production, it is possible to cancel the continuous role production itself. Since the need for regulation is determined after the production starts, the movable accessory must be regulated halfway through. Therefore, by displaying the substitute role product image instead of the movable role product, the continuity of the production can be maintained.

For example, when regulating the action of the left movable accessory 943 under the conditions described in (1) and (2) above, as shown in FIG. The object image 945 is displayed at the position where the left movable accessory 943 is expected to protrude. The substitute role product image 945 is an image having an appearance similar in shape and size to the left movable role product 943 . The substitute role product image 945 is displayed so as to horizontally move in the same manner as the left movable role product 943 . By displaying the substitute role object image 945, it is possible to make it appear as if the left movable role object 943 is moving as a whole even if the real left movable role object 943 has stopped moving. It is possible to ensure visual continuity of the continuous role production using the role 943 . Also, in the example of this figure, even when the movement of only one of the pair of movable accessories (the left movable accessory 943) should be restricted, the movement of the other paired accessory (the right movable accessory 944) is also restricted at the same time, Replace with the substitute role product image 945 . This is because if only one of them is replaced with the substitute role product image 945, the substitute role product image and the movable role product constitute a pair of pseudo movable roles, which may spoil the appearance. However, as a modification, when the action of one of the pair of movable accessory should be restricted, only one of them may be restricted and replaced with the alternative accessory image 945 . A follow-up visual effect image 941 is also displayed near or in the background of the substitute role product image 945 .

The alternative role product image 945 is in a mode that does not reduce the visibility of the alternative pattern (the first alternative pattern 801 or the second alternative pattern 802) as the non-subject decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 57(b), it is displayed in a layer (layer with low display priority) lower than the non-main decorative pattern, so that the non-main decorative pattern is not covered. may be Further, when regulation occurs at the timing of starting the action of the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944, the alternative accessory image 945 is displayed from the beginning and the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 are displayed. The action may be canceled.

The substitute role product image 945 may be displayed regardless of whether or not the left movable role product 943 and the right movable role product 944 are regulated. In the case of that specification, when the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 appear, the substitute accessory image 945 is almost superimposed behind the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944. Although the production by the accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 is not visually hindered, by displaying regardless of the presence or absence of the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944, there is no need to switch the display content. , the processing load can be reduced.

FIG. 58 is a time chart exemplifying the relationship between the variable performance, the motion of the movable role, the alternative role product image, and the visual effect in the continuous role performance. The illustrated continuous role production is composed of three pattern variation productions of a first variation 950, a second variation 951, and a third variation 952. At each timing, the movable role is operated, and each time the number of fluctuations increases, It is premised on vibrating in such a way that the shaking is increased. Here, in the example of this figure, the motions of the left movable role 943 and the right movable role 944 are executed in the "small" vibration motion in the first variation 950, but the second variation 951 and the third variation 952 In , the movement is restricted and does not appear. In the second variation 951, the substitute role product image 945 is displayed in place of the left movable role product 943 and the right movable role product 944, and the "medium" vibrating action is displayed. is displayed to display a “large” vibration action. As a result, the visual continuity of the continuous character production is maintained, and the development of the production mode over a plurality of stages is ensured. Also, regarding the addition of visual effects, even if the actions of the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 are restricted, the display of the background visual effect image 942 is not restricted and is continuously displayed. That is, the background visual effect image 942 is displayed over the first variation 950 , the second variation 951 , and the third variation 952 while changing the aspect every time the number of variations is repeated.

FIG. 59 schematically shows another example of a substitute character product image. The substitute role product image in this figure is an image that substitutes for the movable role product 820 shown in FIG. 49 and the like. As shown in FIG. 59( a ), the substitute role product image 940 is an image having an appearance similar in shape and size to the movable role product 820 . The substitute role product image 940 is displayed to move up and down like the movable role product 820 . By displaying the substitute role object image 940, even if the real movable role object 820 stops moving, it can be shown as if the movable role object 820 is moving as a whole effect, and the movable role object 820 can be displayed. It is possible to ensure the visual consistency of the performance linked to the role or the visual continuity of the continuous performance of the role. The visual effect images include a follow visual effect image 941 and a background visual effect image 942 . The following visual effect image 941 follows the movement of the movable accessory 820 and is displayed in the vicinity of or overlapping with it. The background visual effect image 942 is an image added as the background of the entire screen. A following visual effect image 941 is added around the substitute role object image 940 and displayed so that the following visual effect image 941 with a flame motif is displayed as the background of the substitute role object image 940 .

The alternative role object image 940 is in a form that does not reduce the visibility of the alternative pattern (the first alternative pattern 801 or the second alternative pattern 802) as the non-subject decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 59(b), it is displayed in a layer (layer with low display priority) lower than the non-main decorative pattern, so that the non-main decorative pattern is not covered. may be Further, when regulation occurs at the timing of starting the action of the movable accessory 820, the alternative accessory image 940 may be displayed from the beginning and the action of the movable accessory 820 may be canceled.

It should be noted that the alternative role product image 940 may be temporarily displayed in place of the action of the movable role product 820 when the movable role product 820 is temporarily regulated and the action is to be resumed thereafter. . Alternatively, the substitute role product image 940 may be displayed regardless of whether or not the movement of the movable role product 820 is regulated. In the case of that specification, when the movable accessory 820 appears, the substitute role product image 940 is almost superimposed behind the movable accessory 820, so it is not visually recognized, and the performance by the movable accessory 820 is not visually hindered. By displaying regardless of the presence or absence of the appearance of the movable accessory 820, there is no need to switch the display content, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, as an example in which the substitute role product image is not used, the production control means 304 determines that the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern can be reduced by the action of the movable role product 820 in the continuous role product production. , restricts one or more operations of the movable accessory 820 and addition of visual effect images scheduled to be executed after the determination. For example, if the movable accessory 820 is operated at the timing of the stop display of the non-main decorative pattern at the start or execution of the continuous role production, there is a risk that the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern that is stopped is reduced. In some cases, the execution of the remaining continuous character presentation may be canceled. In that case, since the continuity of the continuous role product performance is interrupted by the cancellation, not only the execution of the action of the movable role product 820 but also the addition of the visual effect is similarly canceled. This is because if only the following visual effect image 941 premised on the presence of the movable accessory 820 is displayed despite the action of the movable accessory 820 being canceled, the appearance of the presentation deteriorates. As a result, after the continuity of the continuous role object production is discontinued, the movement of the movable role object 820 and the addition of the following visual effect image 941 are executed in a discontinuous manner, so as not to cause a sense of incongruity in the production. can do. However, even when the action of the movable accessory 820 is cancelled, only the background visual effect image 942 that does not assume the presence of the movable accessory 820 may be continued to be displayed without being cancelled. In this way, depending on the presence or absence of movement of the movable accessory 820, addition of visual effects may be controlled to be displayed or hidden for each visual effect according to the type of visual effect and the nature of the presentation.

In addition, when the return action of the movable accessory 820 is regulated and delayed, the display of the following visual effect image 941 is not displayed because it is assumed that the movable accessory 820 exists, and the display is delayed. If it becomes monotonous, there is a possibility that the player may think that the movable accessory 820 is malfunctioning or malfunctioning. Therefore, when delaying the action of the movable accessory 820, the display of the following visual effect image 941 is also restricted, and the command to erase the background visual effect image 942 is also restricted and delayed, or the background visual effect image 942 is displayed. By transmitting a command to do so, the background visual effect image 942 is continuously displayed even while the action of the movable accessory 820 is delayed. As a result, the player does not feel that the movable accessory 820 has a failure or trouble, and the player does not feel discomfort in the presentation.

FIG. 60 is a time chart exemplifying the relationship between the variable effect, the action of the movable character, the following visual effect, and the background visual effect in the continuous character effect. The illustrated continuous role production is composed of three pattern variation productions of a first variation 950, a second variation 951, and a third variation 952. At each timing, the movable role is operated, and each time the number of fluctuations increases, It is premised on vibrating in such a way that the shaking is increased. Here, in the example of this figure, the motions of the left movable role 943 and the right movable role 944 are executed in the "small" vibration motion in the first variation 950, but the second variation 951 and the third variation 952 In , the movement is restricted and does not appear. Regarding the addition of the following visual effect image 941, it is displayed in the first variation 950, but if the motions of the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 are restricted, there will be no target to follow. The following visual effect image 941 is also not displayed in the 3-variation 952 . On the other hand, regarding the addition of the background visual effect image 942, even if the actions of the left movable accessory 943 and the right movable accessory 944 are restricted, the display of the background visual effect image 942 is not restricted, and not only the first variation 950 but also the It continues to be displayed in the second variation 951 and the third variation 952 as well. That is, the background visual effect image 942 is displayed over the first variation 950 , the second variation 951 , and the third variation 952 while changing the aspect every time the number of variations is repeated.

In addition, among the multiple times of variable performance display in which the continuous role performance is executed, if the performance has reached the predetermined times after the middle stage or the latter half, the remaining movable role performances and visual effect images are displayed. (For example, from the timing of the first variation 950, when the chance pattern is executed to add the “medium” vibration operation or the “green” visual effect image, the second Even if the action of the movable character and the addition of the visual effect image are restricted by the second variation 951, it may be restarted by the third variation 952. At this time, the production other than the background visual effect is temporarily performed. is treated as “continuing” even though continuity is lost). This is because the player expects that the possibility of developing reach or a big win is relatively high when the continuous accessory presentation is repeated a plurality of times and reaches the middle stage or the latter half, or when it is executed in a chance pattern. . In that case, if only the beginning or the first half of the multiple variable performance displays in which the continuous role performance is executed has been completed, the remaining movable role movements and the addition of visual effect images are canceled. It is also possible to For example, when changing the color of the visual effect image in the order of blue, green, and red in the continuous role production, if the second stage "green" is reached, the remaining movable role or the addition of the visual effect image may be continued without restriction.

The display of the following visual effect image 941 and the background visual effect image 942 is normally performed in accordance with the time schedule of the entire variable performance regardless of the movement of the movable accessory 820. Therefore, the movement of the movable accessory 820 is canceled or delayed, the display of the following visual effect image 941 and the background visual effect image 942 must also be switched between display and non-display. Therefore, the display of the following visual effect image 941 and the background visual effect image 942 is configured in a control format called an immediate command, in which display and non-display can be switched immediately in response to the display command. The display is controlled by synchronizing with Note that effect display elements other than the elements whose display is controlled by the immediate command are displayed according to the time schedule based on the effect pattern, and are not on/off controlled by intermediate commands. Elements that are displayed based on directing patterns rather than immediate commands are mainly displayed on lower layers, and elements that are displayed by immediate commands are displayed on higher layers with higher display priority. preferable.

It should be noted that the movable accessories of this embodiment are often deterministically implemented due to variation patterns accompanied by reach development and winning/losing branching (effects informing the final outcome, such as reach informing whether or not a big hit has been achieved). (For example, when receiving a variation pattern of the battle reach of a big hit, as a result, it is always necessary to perform a role-linked effect, etc.). However, since the execution of the effect that activates the accessories other than the movable accessories is determined by the detailed advance notice lottery and the pre-reading lottery after receiving the fluctuation pattern, the other accessories other than the movable accessories can also be operated for each role. Trends may differ. In addition, when a plurality of types of movable accessories are paired, if the return action of one of the movable accessories is regulated and delayed, the return action of the other paired movable accessory is also regulated at the same time. may be delayed. In that case, the appearance of the presentation may be maintained by executing the return motion at the same timing after the delay.

(5) The accessory-linked effect includes an operation-type accessory-linked effect that causes the movable accessory 820 to start operating in response to an operation input by the player via the operation input means. In the case of the operation-type accessory-linked effect, the effect control means 304 starts the action of the movable accessory 820 at the timing according to the operation input by the operation input means. The operation input means are, for example, the production button 109, the production lever 112, the cross key 110, and the like. For example, when an operation-type accessory interlocking effect is used as a button effect such as a win-lose branch during a ready-to-win effect, when the player operates the button at the end of the ready-to-win effect and the movable accessory 820 operates, the occurrence of a big win is notified. It is possible to produce a performance such as

The effect control means 304 executes a predetermined process of regulating the movement of the movable accessory 820 that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern when the execution period of the return action overlaps with the stop display timing of the non-main decorative pattern. do. The "predetermined processing" referred to here may be executing switching to a presentation mode in which the movable accessory 820 is not operated, changing the timing of starting the operation of the movable accessory 820 or starting the return operation, or , to change the contents of the action of the movable accessory 820 . The "change in action content" may be, for example, a change in action time or action speed. It may be a change to a performance linked to a character that starts an action at a predetermined timing that does not require an operation input.

FIG. 61 is a time chart showing the relationship between the effective period of the operation-type accessory-linked production, the production operation start timing, and the return operation start. Validity period 960 is a period for receiving the player's operation input for starting the operation-type accessory-linked effect. The example of FIG. 61(a) shows a case where the player performs an operation input at a relatively early stage (timing t1) within the effective period 960. In the example of FIG. The first period 961 is a period of performance linked to the character, and starts at timing t1. The example of FIG. 61(b) shows a case where the player performs an operation input at a relatively late stage (timing t2) within the validity period 960. In the example of FIG. The fourth period 964 is a period of performance linked to the character, and starts at timing t2.

The execution timing of the return operation of the movable accessory 820 is constant (timing t3) regardless of the timing of the operation by the player during the valid period at the start of the presentation. That is, the earlier the operation is input during the effective period, the longer the time during which the movable accessory 820 is in the effect operation state (the second period 962). The time (fifth period 965) during which the role object 820 is in the effect operation state is shortened. In the performance linked to the character product in the first period 961, the return action is executed in the third period 963 from timing t3. In the fourth period 964 as well, the returning action is performed in the sixth period 966 from timing t3. The player can also understand that the return operation is executed at the same timing regardless of the timing of the operation input, not after a certain period of time has elapsed from the timing of the operation input by the player at the start of the operation type accessory interlocking performance. As a result, since the determination of the start timing of the return motion does not depend on the player's operation input, the determination is not complicated, and the determination of the motion restriction based on the possibility of interference with the non-main decorative symbols is facilitated.

Here, for example, when the operation-type accessory interlocking effect is used as a button effect such as a win-lose branch during the ready-to-win effect, even though the player has operated the button to start the action of the movable accessory 820, the movable accessory 820 can be moved. If the condition for restricting the movement of the accessory 820 is met and the movable accessory 820 does not move, it may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore,

When the return action of the movable accessory 820 and the stop display of the alternative pattern related to the non-main decorative pattern interfere, one of the following controls is performed.
(a) If the effect control means 304 determines the possibility of interference before the start of the action of the movable accessory 820, even if the effect is switched to a mode that does not involve the action of the movable accessory 820, for example, an effect other than the accessory-linked effect good.
(b) The effect control means 304 may delay the return action of the movable accessory 820 in the same manner as in (1) and (2) above, or conversely may advance the execution of the return action ahead of schedule.
(c) The effect control means 304 may switch to displaying the alternative role product image 940 instead of moving the movable role product 820 without moving the movable role product 820 .
It should be noted that, when determining whether or not to execute a predetermined process such as regulation of the motion regarding the start timing of the performance action of the movable accessory 820, there is a width corresponding to the time set as the valid period 960 of the operation input. As a judgment of whether or not there is interference between the production operation of the movable accessory 820 and the stop display of the alternative pattern related to the non-main decorative pattern, it is judged by whether or not the maximum production period including the valid period 960 overlaps with the stop period of the non-main decorative pattern. You may

(6) In a modified example, a so-called transparent liquid crystal display is adopted as the effect display device 60, and a light-emitting substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged is installed behind the transmissive liquid crystal display. A 'transmission effect' is realized by coordinating the image effect displayed on the screen and the light emission effect by the LED behind, and the display effect of the image is enhanced. The LEDs installed behind the effect display device 60 may be built in a movable accessory provided behind the effect display device 60, instead of using a normal light-emitting substrate. It should be noted that the "transparent effect" is a effect executed in the low probability low base state 620 (game state in which the first special symbol 51 is the main component).

Here, in the transmissive effect, since the brightness of the light from the backlight of the transparent liquid crystal display or the light guide plate is reduced, if the alternative pattern related to the non-main decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at this time, There is a risk that the visibility of the stop display mode will be lowered and the game result will be difficult to see. Therefore, when the non-main decorative pattern is to be stopped and displayed during execution of the transmissive effect, the brightness of the light from the backlight of the transparent liquid crystal display or the light guide plate is controlled to return to 100%. In this case, the light emission of the LED accompanying the transmission effect continues.

FIG. 62 shows the relationship between the arrangement of LEDs installed behind the transparent liquid crystal display and the position of the non-main decorative pattern. A plurality of LEDs 970 are arranged in a matrix behind the transparent liquid crystal display. Among them, the lower left corner LED 971 is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower left corner of the screen. The position of the lower left corner LED 971 is the first alternative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 51 (that is, the special symbol that executes the "transmission effect" as a variable effect) that is the subject of display of the main decorative symbol 800. Although it is close to 801, it is sufficiently far away from the position of the second alternative pattern 802, which is the non-subject decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern 52 which is not the object of display of the main decorative pattern 800. - 特許庁That is, the second alternative pattern 802 is arranged at a position farther than the distance between the first alternative pattern 801 and the lower left corner LED 971 . In this way, the second alternative pattern 802 does not overlap the LED 970, especially the LED 971 in the lower left corner, and is sufficiently far away, so that the problem of visibility deterioration due to too bright LED emission can be avoided. be. It should be noted that an LED may be provided to ensure the visibility of the alternative symbol, and the visibility may be ensured by emitting light when the alternative symbol is stopped during the transmissive effect.

The present invention has been described above based on the examples. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to combinations of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention. be. Modified examples are given below.

Note that the techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following aspects.

[First aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
In the first game state, which is an easy-to-enter state, when the result of the win/loss determination by the first win/fail determination means or the second win/fail determination means is a big win, the start of the symbol variation related to the result of the win/fail determination is started. End the easy-to-enter state as an opportunity,
In a second game state which is an easy ball-entering state and is a state different from the first game state, when the result of the win/loss determination by the first win/fail determination means or the second win/fail determination means is a big hit. , a pinball game machine characterized in that the easy ball entry state is ended with the end of the symbol variation related to the result of the decision.
[Item 2]
The first gaming state is a probability change state and an easy ball entry state,
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the second game state is a normal probability state and an easy ball entry state.
[Item 3]
In the first game state, a specific effect can be executed only when the result of the win/loss determination by the first win/fail determination means or the second win/fail determination means is a big hit, and in the specific effect, the big win is performed. Executes an effect that suggests to the player whether the special game corresponding to is a special game with a transition to the probability fluctuation state,
Item 1 or 2, characterized in that in the second game state, the specific performance can be executed even when the result of the win/loss determination by the first win/fail determination means or the second win/fail determination means is a big win. Pinball game machine described.
[Item 4]
Any one of items 1 to 3, characterized in that in the first game state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. Pinball game machine described.
[Item 5]
In the first game state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the second success/failure determination means in the probability fluctuation state is a big hit, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. Determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol so that the time is relatively long,
In the first gaming state, which is triggered by the result of the winning judgment by the first winning judgment means or the second winning judgment means in the normal game state and the normal ball entering state, the first game state 5. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 4, characterized in that the variation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation variation time of the special symbol is relatively short.
[Item 6]
When determining the variation time of the first special symbol so that the deviation variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long in the first game state, the number of the first reservations reaches a predetermined number or more 6. The pinball game machine according to item 4 or 5, characterized in that the condition is that the
[Item 7]
When one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the display control means makes the other variably displayed on standby, and when it is time to start varying the first special symbol, the 7. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 4 to 6, wherein the variable display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed even if the lottery value is reserved as the second reservation.
[Item 8]
The display control means variably displays the first special symbol even when the second special symbol is varying, variably displays the second special symbol even when the first special symbol is varying,
In the first game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the deviation variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reservations is a predetermined number or more. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized by:
[Item 9]
When one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the display control means makes the other variably displayed on standby, and when it is time to start varying the second special symbol, the Even if the lottery value is reserved as the first reservation, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed,
In the first game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the deviation variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reservations is a predetermined number or more. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized by:

[Second aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
When the type of the special symbol to be stop-displayed is the first symbol when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success-or-failure determination means or the second success-or-failure determination means is a big hit, the first symbol is stop-displayed. After the execution of the special game executed in , the game state is shifted to the first game state which is the easy-ball-entering state in which the end condition of the easy-ball-entering state is the first condition,
When the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the second success/failure determination means is a big hit is the second symbol which is a type different from the first symbol. , After the execution of the special game, which is executed by stop-displaying the second symbol, the easy-ball-entering state is set to a second condition different from the first condition as the end condition of the easy-ball-entering state. A pinball game machine characterized by shifting to a game state of 2.
[Item 2]
The first condition is the start of pattern variation according to the result of the success/failure determination when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit,
The pinball game machine according to item 1, characterized in that the second condition is the end of the symbol variation related to the result of the success/failure determination when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit.
[Item 3]
The first condition is that the number of symbol variations after transitioning to the easy-to-ball state reaches a predetermined number of times,
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the second condition is a case where the result of the hit/fail determination is a small hit.
[Item 4]
4. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein the first game state and the second game state are the same game state, and are both a probability variable state and an easy ball entry state. .
[Item 5]
The first game state and the second game state are different game states,
The first gaming state is a probability change state and an easy ball entry state,
4. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein the second game state is a normal probability state and an easy ball entry state.
[Item 6]
Any one of items 1 to 5, characterized in that in the first game state, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. Pinball game machine described.
[Item 7]
In the first game state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the second success/failure determination means in the probability fluctuation state is a big hit, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. Determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol so that the time is relatively long,
In the first gaming state, which is triggered by the result of the winning judgment by the first winning judgment means or the second winning judgment means in the normal game state and the normal ball entering state, the first game state 6. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, wherein the variation time of the first special symbol is determined so that the deviation variation time of the special symbol is relatively short.
[Item 8]
When determining the variation time of the first special symbol so that the deviation variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long in the first game state, the number of the first reservations reaches a predetermined number or more 8. The pinball game machine according to item 6 or 7, characterized in that the condition is that the
[Item 9]
When one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the display control means makes the other variably displayed on standby, and when it is time to start varying the first special symbol, the 9. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 6 to 8, characterized in that the variable display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed even if the lottery value is reserved as the second reserve.
[Item 10]
The display control means variably displays the first special symbol even when the second special symbol is varying, variably displays the second special symbol even when the first special symbol is varying,
In the first game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the deviation variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reservations is a predetermined number or more. 6. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, characterized by:
[Item 11]
When one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the display control means makes the other variably displayed on standby, and when it is time to start varying the second special symbol, the Even if the lottery value is reserved as the first reservation, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed,
In the first game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined so that the deviation variation time of the second special symbol becomes relatively long when the number of the first reservations is a predetermined number or more. 6. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 5, characterized by:

[Third aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
In the first situation, which is the normal ball entry state, a predetermined output means outputs a warning prompting the player to hit a ball aimed at the first start hole when the ball enters the second start hole. On the other hand, in the second situation, which is a situation different from the first situation, which is the normal ball entry state, even if the ball is entered into the second start port, the player is not notified of the first start. A pinball game machine characterized by not outputting a warning prompting a hit ball aimed at the mouth by a predetermined output means.
[Item 2]
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein when a ball enters the second start port while the warning is being output, the output of the warning over the predetermined period of time is restarted.
[Item 3]
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
further comprising
3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein the warning is switched from the output normal state to the output restricted state when the second hold reaches the upper limit while the warning is being output.
[Item 4]
Items 1 to 3, wherein the warning is terminated when a ball is entered into the first starting hole or when a situation arises in which the ball should be entered into the second starting hole while the warning is being output. The pinball game machine according to any one of .
[Item 5]
Until a predetermined period elapses after the situation in which the ball should enter the second starting hole changes to the situation in which the ball should enter the first starting hole, even in the normal probability state and the normal ball entering state, the above 5. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the output of warning is restricted.
[Item 6]
Item 6. The pinball game machine according to item 5, wherein the restriction is canceled when a predetermined number or more of balls enter the second start port while the output of the warning is restricted.
[Item 7]
7. The pinball game machine according to item 5 or 6, characterized in that, even while the output of the warning is restricted, the display for guiding the player to hit the ball aimed at the first starting port is not restricted. .
[Item 8]
In the easy ball entry state or in the probability fluctuation state and normal ball entry state, the player is hit with a ball aimed at the second start hole for at least a predetermined period of time triggered by the ball entry into the first start hole. If a warning prompting is output, and a ball enters the second starting hole during the output of the warning, or if the ball should enter the first starting hole, the warning being output ends. 8. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 7, characterized in that

[Fourth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
As the types of special games, there are a first special game in which a relatively large profit is given to the player during execution of the special game, and a second special game in which a relatively small profit is given to the player during execution of the special game. There are 2 special games, and after the first special game ends, the probability fluctuating state and easy ball entry state, while after the second special game ends, the probability fluctuating state and normal ball entering state, or normal It becomes a probability state and an easy ball entry state,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the profit given to the player during the probability variable state and normal ball entry state is greater than the profit given to the player during the probability variable state and easy ball entry state.
[Item 2]
The expected value of prize ball acquisition during the period of the second special game is calculated from the sum of the expected value of prize ball acquisition during the period of the first special game and the expected value of prize ball acquisition during the period of the probability fluctuation state and the easy ball entry state. 2. The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the total value of prize ball acquisition expected values during the period of the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state is larger.
[Item 3]
In the pattern variation performance that triggers the execution of the second special game, a performance indicating that the result is disadvantageous to the player is executed, and in the performance at the start of the second special game, the special game ends. 3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, which executes an effect suggesting which of the probability variable state and normal ball entry state and the normal probability state and easy ball entry state will occur later.

[Fifth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol even when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and for variably displaying the second special symbol even when the first special symbol is fluctuating;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
The production control means is
variably displaying a plurality of decorative symbols showing the results of the suitability determination on the effect display device;
In the normal entering state, the first decorative design corresponding to the first special design is variably displayed without displaying the second decorative design corresponding to the second special design, A plurality of first alternative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and displayed in an area smaller than the first decorative symbol, a simple symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and simply showing the result of the success/failure determination; further fluctuate,
In the easy-to-enter state, the second decorative symbols are variably displayed without displaying the first decorative symbols, and a plurality of second decorative symbols are displayed in an area corresponding to the second special symbols and smaller than the second decorative symbols. Further variably displaying an alternative pattern and a simple pattern simply showing a result of the success/failure determination corresponding to the second special pattern,
In the easy-to-enter state after the end of the special game related to the big hit of the first special symbol generated in the normal probability state and the normal ball-entering state, the simple symbols corresponding to the first special symbol whose variation is stopped are displayed in a stopped state. In that case, display the stop design mode indicating the deviation as the simple design,
In the initial variable display of the first special symbol when the easy-to-enter state transitions to the normal-entered state, the variable display is performed from the symbol combination indicating that the plurality of first decorative symbols and the plurality of first alternative symbols are out. A pinball game machine characterized by starting.
[Item 2]
The alternative pattern is displayed in a complementary manner in addition to the display of the decorative pattern, and is a pattern for ensuring that the pattern is always displayed at any location within the screen of the effect display device. ,
The simple symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and is a symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination. The pinball game machine according to item 1.
[Item 3]
In the normal probability state and normal ball entry state, in the variation display of the second special symbol, after a predetermined first time from the start of variation, the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is hidden, and the second special symbol is displayed. While canceling the non-display of the simple pattern to display the simple pattern a predetermined second time before the scheduled timing of stopping the fluctuation of the pattern, the first time in the case of shifting from the easy-entering state to the normal entering state, or The bullet according to item 1 or 2, wherein the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not hidden in the first variable display of the second special symbol after the power of the pinball game machine is turned on. ball game machine.

[Sixth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol even when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and for variably displaying the second special symbol even when the first special symbol is fluctuating;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
a movable accessory operable in front of the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
The production control means is
variably displaying a plurality of decorative symbols showing the results of the suitability determination on the effect display device;
In the normal probability state and the normal entering state, the decorative design corresponding to the second special design is not displayed, and the decorative design corresponding to the first special design is displayed, and the decorative design corresponding to the decorative design is displayed. further variably displaying a plurality of alternative patterns displayed in an area smaller than the decorative pattern and a simple pattern simply showing the result of the success/failure determination corresponding to the first special pattern;
At least in the easy-to-enter state, the decorative design corresponding to the first special design is not displayed, and the decorative design corresponding to the second special design is displayed, and the decorative design is displayed in a manner corresponding to the decorative design. further variably displaying a plurality of alternative symbols displayed in a small area and a simple symbol simply showing the result of the success/failure determination corresponding to the second special symbol;
The operation completion position of the movable accessory is a position where the simple symbol corresponding to the second special symbol can overlap,
At least in the normal ball-entering state, the movable accessory is not operated for a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time from a timing a first predetermined time before the scheduled fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. A pinball game machine characterized by:
[Item 2]
Further comprising a production accessory that can be displayed in a production manner by emitting light on the screen of the production display device,
Item 1. The pinball game machine according to item 1, characterized in that the light emission of the performance accessory corresponding to the first special symbol is restricted for at least a predetermined period of time from when the second special symbol stops changing.

[Seventh aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
As types of special games, there are at least a first special game and a second special game, and after the first special game ends, the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entry state do not occur, while the second special game is performed. After the end, it will be in a probability fluctuation state and a normal entry state,
The profit given to the player during the variable probability state and normal ball entry state is greater than the profit given to the player during the variable probability state and easy ball entry state,
In a situation where the probability variation state and the normal ball entry state are scheduled to occur after the end of the second special game, the specific effect to be executed in the probability variation state and the normal ball entry state is executed during the execution of the second special game. On the other hand, in a situation where a game state other than the probability changing state and the easy ball entry state is expected after the end of the first special game, the specific effect is not executed during the execution of the first special game. A pinball game machine characterized by:
[Item 2]
When the probability change state and the normal ball entry state occur after the second special game ends, the effect executed during the special game period continues even in the probability change state and the normal ball entry state after the end of the special game. The pinball game machine according to item 1, characterized in that
[Item 3]
Said first success/failure determination means, said second success/failure determination means, said first pattern determination means, said second pattern determination means, said special game control means, said small winning game control means, said entering ball state setting means, and said The probability state setting means is provided in a main control unit that controls the operation of the game,
The effect determination means is provided in a sub-control unit that controls the effect action of the game,
The effect determination means is executed when the big winning hole is opened in the small winning game when executing the effect executed in the probability fluctuation state and the normal ball entering state during the period of the special game related to the second big win. A simulated performance at the time of opening the small prize is executed based on the command for opening the big prize winning opening generated by the main control part, and the performance executed when closing the big winning prize opening in the small winning game is simulated. A simulated small winning close performance is executed based on the closing command of the big winning opening generated by the main control unit, and after the pseudo small winning closed performance is completed, the number of won prize balls in the small winning game is displayed. A pseudo small winning end effect simulating the end effect, a pseudo small winning variation effect simulating pattern variation related to the small win, and a pseudo small winning starting effect simulating the start demonstration effect of the small winning game are performed by the sub control unit. 3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, characterized in that it is executed based on the generated command.
[Item 4]
When the probability fluctuation state and normal ball entry state do not occur after the end of the second special game, the time of the end effect of the special game is relatively lengthened, and the probability fluctuation state and normal after the end of the second special game. 4. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized in that the time of the end effect of the special game is relatively shortened when entering a state of ball entry.

[Eighth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
As performance contents that can be executed within a period in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed once in a variable display, a first notice performance and a second notice with a higher degree of expectation of transition to a special game than the first notice performance. having at least a rendition and
It is possible to execute a specific performance to make it look as if a predetermined performance content is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing within a period in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed once in a variable display,
While the first notice effect and the second notice effect are not executed during execution of the specific effect, the first notice effect or the second notice effect can be executed after the specific effect is executed,
As the predetermined timing, at least a first timing and a second timing that is a timing after the first timing are provided, and when the specific performance is executed at the first timing, the second notice performance is performed. is low, but the possibility of occurrence of the first notice effect is high. On the other hand, when the specific effect is executed at the second timing, the possibility of occurrence of the first notice effect is low. is configured to increase the possibility of occurrence of the second notice effect.
[Item 2]
A first notice performance or a second notice performance is generated after execution of a specific performance that suspends the performance at a predetermined timing in one variable performance period, and in the case of the first notice performance, a predetermined after re-execution of the variable performance. After the execution of the specific performance that pauses the performance again at the timing of , the first notice performance or the second notice performance is further generated, thereby executing the performance that makes it look like multiple pseudo pattern fluctuations have been executed. may be
Further comprising operation input means for receiving operation input by the player,
In the specific effect, a predetermined effect, which is an effect that prompts the player to input an operation to the operation input means and generates the first notice effect or the second notice effect in response to an operation input by the player, is executed. may be
When the time from the start of variation of the variable performance or the re-execution of the performance to the temporary stop is relatively short, the possibility of generating the first notice performance or the second notice performance after the predetermined performance is generated is relatively. On the other hand, when the time from the start of the fluctuation or the re-execution of the performance to the temporary stop is relatively long, the predetermined performance is generated before the first notice performance or the second notice performance. The pinball game machine according to item 1, which is set so that the possibility of generating is relatively high.
[Item 3]
Item 2, wherein when the predetermined effect occurs, the possibility of the second notice effect occurring after the predetermined effect is generated is higher than the possibility of the first notice effect occurring. ball game machine.
[Item 4]
In some cases, a special effect is executed in which the temporary stop time of the variable effect due to the specific effect exceeds a predetermined time, and the longer the duration of the special effect, the higher the possibility of the occurrence of the second notice effect. The pinball game machine according to item 1 to be set.
[Item 5]
5. The pinball game machine according to item 4, wherein the end timing of the special effect is synchronized with the generation timing of the specific effect.
[Item 6]
Item 4 or 5, characterized in that when the second notice performance occurs after the execution of the special performance, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when the second notice performance occurs without the special performance being performed. Pinball game machine described.

[Ninth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
The variation pattern may be composed of a combination of one of a plurality of types of basic variation patterns and one of a plurality of types of additional variation patterns,
By referring to the basic variation pattern selection criteria according to the result of the suitability determination, one basic variation pattern is selected according to the result of the suitability determination,
One variation addition pattern corresponding to the selected basic variation pattern is selected by referring to the variation addition pattern selection criteria corresponding to the selected one basic variation pattern,
The plurality of types of basic variation patterns include at least a first basic variation pattern and a second basic variation pattern, and even when the first basic variation pattern is selected, the second basic variation pattern is selected. Even if it is done, it is possible to execute a specific production,
Even if the first basic variation pattern is selected or the second basic variation pattern is selected, a specific variation addition pattern can be selected, while the first basic variation pattern is selected and the second basic variation pattern is selected, the types of variation addition pattern selection criteria for which the specific variation addition pattern to be referred to is included in the selection candidates are different. game machine.
[Item 2]
A first notice performance or a second notice performance is generated after execution of a specific performance that suspends the performance at a predetermined timing in one variable performance period, and in the case of the first notice performance, a predetermined after re-execution of the variable performance. After the execution of the specific performance that pauses the performance again at the timing of , the first notice performance or the second notice performance is further generated, thereby executing the performance that makes it look like multiple pseudo pattern fluctuations have been executed. may be
When the time from the start of variation of the variable performance or the re-execution of the performance to the temporary stop is relatively short, the possibility of occurrence of the second notice performance is low, but the possibility of occurrence of the first notice performance is set to be high. On the other hand, if the time from the start of the fluctuation or the re-execution of the effect to the temporary stop is relatively long, the possibility of the first notice effect occurring is low, but the possibility of the second notice effect occurring is high. is set and
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the variable addition pattern is a pattern that defines the type and timing of the first notice effect.
[Item 3]
3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein the plurality of types of variation patterns include a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern that are common to each other in terms of variation performance and variation time.
[Item 4]
In the normal probability state and the normal ball entry state, if the result of the win/fail judgment corresponds to the small hit, the variation addition time of any of the plurality of types of variation addition patterns for the basic variation pattern corresponding to the small hit 4. The pinball game machine according to any one of items 1 to 3, characterized by adding a predetermined additional time.
[Item 5]
5. The bullet according to any one of items 1 to 4, wherein the plurality of types of variation patterns include a variation pattern that can be selected regardless of whether the result of the hit/fail determination corresponds to a big hit or a miss. game machine.
[Item 6]
In the variation pattern that can be selected, when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, a predetermined addition time, which is a time other than the variation addition time, is added to the variation time, and when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a failure, the predetermined addition time is added. The pinball game machine according to item 5, wherein the additional time is not added to the variable time.
[Item 7]
Of the plurality of types of variation patterns, only one predetermined type of variation addition pattern is associated with the variation pattern corresponding to the performance leading to the big win through the first notice performance, whereas the first notice performance is associated. 7. The bullet according to any one of items 1 to 6, wherein a plurality of types of variable addition patterns are associated with the variable pattern corresponding to the performance leading to a big hit in no time. game machine.

[Tenth Aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
In the normal entering state, the time from the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol to the start of the next fluctuation depends on whether the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit or a miss. In the easy-to-enter state, the time from the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol to the start of the next fluctuation is constant regardless of whether the result of the judgment by the second judgment means is a small hit or a miss. A pinball game machine.
[Item 2]
The decorative symbols related to the second special symbols are stop-displayed in a symbol mode indicating other than a small win in the easy-to-enter state when the symbol fixing time to be stopped and displayed in a symbol mode indicating a small win is set to the first time. The fixed symbol time to be displayed is the second time obtained by adding the time for the small winning game to the first time, and the fixed symbol time to be stopped and displayed in the symbol mode indicating other than the small winning in the normal ball-entering state is the second time. The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the third time is shorter than the time.
[Item 3]
The second time includes the first time, a fourth time that is the start demonstration time of the small winning game that occurs in the easy-to-enter state, a fifth time that is the ending demonstration time of the small winning game, and the small winning game. The pinball game machine according to item 2, characterized in that it is the sum of the sixth time, which is the execution time of the winning game.
[Item 3]
The starting demonstration time of the small winning game that occurs in the normal state is the seventh time different from the fourth time, the ending demonstration time of the small winning game is the eighth time different from the fifth time, and the small winning game The pinball game machine according to item 3, wherein the execution time of the winning game is the sixth hour.

[11th aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol even when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and for variably displaying the second special symbol even when the first special symbol is fluctuating;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an effect control means for displaying the effect content based on the determination by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
In a predetermined situation in the normal ball entering state, the contents of the background display can be changed with at least one of the start and stop of variation of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol is started. and configured not to change the content of the background display when the fluctuation stops,
Under a predetermined situation in the easy-to-enter state, the content of the background display can be changed with at least one of the start and stop of variation of the second special symbol as a trigger, while the content of the first special symbol can be changed. configured not to change the content of the background display when the fluctuation starts and stops,
In the final symbol variation during the continuation period of the easy-to-enter state, the background display can be updated with at least one of the start and stop of variation of the second special symbol as a trigger, and the variation of the first special symbol. A pinball game machine characterized in that the background display can be updated with at least one of start and stop of fluctuation as a trigger.
[Item 2]
The first success/failure determination means, the second success/failure determination means, the first pattern determination means, the second pattern determination means, the display control means, the special game control means, and the entering ball state setting means are used in the game provided in the main control unit that controls the operation of
The effect determination means is provided in a sub-control unit that controls the effect action of the game,
When a reset due to a predetermined error occurs in at least one of the main control unit and the sub-control unit, the background display is triggered by at least one of the start and stop of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Item 1. The pinball game machine according to item 1, characterized in that the background display can be updated with at least one of the start of variation and the stop of variation of the second special symbol as a trigger.
[Item 3]
After the end of the continuation period of the easy-to-enter state, the game result in the easy-to-enter state after a certain period of time has passed since the last symbol change variation stop command in the continuation period is transmitted until the next change starts. 3. The pinball game machine according to item 1 or 2, wherein a normal background immediate switching designation command for immediately switching from a special background for displaying to a normal background is transmitted.

[Twelfth aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
an operation port through which a game ball can be entered;
an expansion mechanism attached to the second starting port and capable of allowing or facilitating entry of a game ball into the second starting port when the opening is expanded;
a large winning opening that allows or facilitates entry of game balls when opened;
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
A normal pattern display device that variably displays a normal pattern for indicating that the expansion mechanism is to be expanded, triggered by the ball entering the operation opening;
A first pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a variation pattern selection criterion;
A second pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on variation pattern selection criteria;
Display control means for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
a first reservation control means for withholding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means as a first suspension until the first success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination, up to a predetermined number of pieces as an upper limit; ,
a second holding control means for holding the lottery value used in the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means as a second suspension, up to a predetermined number of numbers, until the second success/failure determination means performs a success/failure determination; ,
special game control means for executing a special game with opening of the big winning opening when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
If the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, or if the result of the success/failure determination of at least one of the first success/failure determination means and the second success/failure determination means is a small hit, A small-hit game control means for executing a small-hit game with the opening of the big winning opening;
As states related to the ease of ball entry into the second starting port, there are a normal ball entry state and an easy ball entry state in which the ball entry is easier than the normal state. ball entry state setting means capable of setting ball easy state;
a normal probability state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means and the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a predetermined probability; probability state setting means having a probability change state in which the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a jackpot with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and is capable of setting a normal probability state or a probability variation state;
a production display device for displaying production contents;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination by the effect determining means;
with
The fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the easy-entering state is a fluctuation time that is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that starts to fluctuate in the normal entering state,
The probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a small hit is relatively higher than the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means is a small hit, or , the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means may not be a small hit, while the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means may be a small win,
When the expansion mechanism is expanded, compared to when the expansion mechanism is not expanded, the positional relationship is such that the ease of entering the ball into the large winning opening is reduced. A second starting opening and the big winning opening are arranged,
At least in the probability fluctuation state and the easy entry state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the normal probability state and the normal entry state. It is possible to determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern selection criteria that is easy to determine,
In the normal probability state and the normal entry state, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, based on the variation pattern selection criteria, a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is easily determined. the variation pattern is determined by
The effect determination means is capable of managing cumulative value information, which is information relating to the cumulative value of the number of prize balls to be paid out,
The effect control means is capable of executing a prize ball addition effect in which the number of awarded balls to be paid out is displayed while being counted up and displayed,
If the cumulative value reaches a specific number while the count-up display in the prize ball addition effect is not completed yet and is being displayed continuously, the count-up display is being continued without being completed. A pinball game machine characterized in that the number of winning balls corresponding to the specific number is highlighted even if the specific number is.
[Item 2]
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the number of winning balls during the count-up is not displayed when a specific effect display occurs during the count-up display.
[Item 3]
After the number of prize balls being counted up is hidden by the specific effect display, when the display of the number of prize balls is restarted by the end of the specific effect display, the incomplete count-up is counted. Item 2. The pinball game machine according to item 2, wherein the display is resumed in a state of being upgraded.

[13th aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
A first decorative pattern corresponding to the first special design and showing the result of the suitability determination by the first suitability determining means in a dramatic manner, and a result of suitability determination by the second suitability determining means corresponding to the second special design. a production display device that displays production contents including a second decorative pattern that shows production,
production determination means for determining production content;
In addition to controlling the execution of performance, a decorative pattern corresponding to either one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed on the performance display device as a relatively large main decorative pattern in accordance with the game state. effect control means for variably displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the effect display device;
In front of the effect display device, it is possible to perform an effect operation with movement in a predetermined area starting from an initial state at a predetermined initial position, and in a return operation from the state of the effect operation to the initial state. a movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern displayed on the display device;
with
The production control means regulates the return motion of the movable accessory along the predetermined trajectory before the non-main decorative pattern is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the non-main decorative pattern stop display period elapses. A pinball game machine characterized in that the return motion of the movable accessory is executed later.

[14th aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
A first decorative pattern corresponding to the first special design and showing the result of the suitability determination by the first suitability determining means in a dramatic manner, and a result of suitability determination by the second suitability determining means corresponding to the second special design. a production display device that displays production contents including a second decorative pattern that shows production,
production determination means for determining production content;
In addition to controlling the execution of performance, a decorative pattern corresponding to either one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed on the performance display device as a relatively large main decorative pattern in accordance with the game state. effect control means for variably displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the effect display device;
In front of the effect display device, it is possible to perform an effect operation involving movement in a predetermined area starting from an initial state at a predetermined initial position, and in the operation accompanying the variable display effect of the main decorative pattern, the effect display device A movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern displayed in the
with
The performance control means can reduce the visibility of the special performance of the movable role upon receiving information indicating the start of pattern variation based on a specific variation pattern associated with a predetermined special performance. A pinball game machine characterized in that control is performed so that movement is regulated.

[15th aspect]
[Item 1]
A starting port that allows entry of a game ball,
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the starting hole, a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a pattern display device that variably displays a special pattern for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means;
special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a big hit;
an effect display device for displaying effect contents including a decorative pattern that expressively indicates the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means in correspondence with the special symbol;
production determination means for determining production content;
Production control means for controlling execution of production;
In front of the effect display device, it is possible to perform an effect operation that starts from an initial state at a predetermined initial position and moves in a predetermined area, and in the operation accompanying the variable display effect of the decorative pattern, the effect display device a movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the displayed decorative pattern and that has a light emitting means;
with
The multiple types of effects that can be executed by the effect control means include a role-linked effect in which a movable accessory is operated in accordance with the display of the effect image,
The effect control means controls the display of the effect image, the movement of the movable role object, and the light emission of the light emitting means, and controls the light emitting means when the character object-linked effect is executed. At least part of it is loop processing that repeatedly executes a specific control pattern,
The performance control means regulates the motion of the movable role along the predetermined trajectory when predetermined conditions are met in the role-linked performance, and during the time the motion of the movable role along the predetermined trajectory is regulated, the loop processing is performed. A pinball game machine characterized by being able to continue execution.

[16th aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
A first decorative pattern corresponding to the first special design and showing the result of the suitability determination by the first suitability determining means in a dramatic manner, and a result of suitability determination by the second suitability determining means corresponding to the second special design. a production display device that displays production contents including a second decorative pattern that shows production,
production determination means for determining production content;
In addition to controlling the execution of performance, a decorative pattern corresponding to either one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed on the performance display device as a relatively large main decorative pattern in accordance with the game state. effect control means for variably displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the effect display device;
In front of the effect display device, it is possible to perform an effect operation involving movement in a predetermined area starting from an initial state at a predetermined initial position, and in the operation accompanying the variable display effect of the main decorative pattern, the effect display device A movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern displayed in the
with
The plurality of types of effects that can be executed by the effect control means include effects in which movable accessories are operated in accordance with the display of effect images, and the effect images are continuously displayed over a plurality of variable effect displays. , the display of the performance image includes a continuous role performance that can add a predetermined visual effect to the performance image in a manner interlocking with the movement of the movable accessory,
The effect control means is capable of changing the aspect of the visual effect each time the variable effect display is repeated in the continuous accessory effect,
The production control means is capable of regulating the movement on the predetermined trajectory in a situation where the movable accessory may reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern in the continuous accessory presentation, adding the visual effect, and and at least one of display of a substitute image, which is an image having an appearance that can visually substitute for the movable accessory.
[Item 2]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
A first decorative pattern corresponding to the first special design and showing the result of the suitability determination by the first suitability determining means in a dramatic manner, and a result of suitability determination by the second suitability determining means corresponding to the second special design. a production display device that displays production contents including a second decorative pattern that shows production,
production determination means for determining production content;
In addition to controlling the execution of performance, a decorative pattern corresponding to either one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed on the performance display device as a relatively large main decorative pattern in accordance with the game state. effect control means for variably displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the effect display device;
In front of the effect display device, it is possible to perform an effect operation involving movement in a predetermined area starting from an initial state at a predetermined initial position, and in the operation accompanying the variable display effect of the main decorative pattern, the effect display device A movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern displayed in the
with
The plurality of types of effects that can be executed by the effect control means include effects in which movable accessories are operated in accordance with the display of effect images, and the effect images are continuously displayed over a plurality of variable effect displays. , the display of the performance image includes a continuous role performance that can add a predetermined visual effect to the performance image in a manner interlocking with the movement of the movable accessory,
When it is determined that the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern may be reduced by the action of the movable role in the continuous role production, the performance control means is scheduled to be executed after the determination. A pinball game machine characterized by restricting one or more operations of the movable accessory and addition of the visual effect.

[17th aspect]
[Item 1]
A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second symbol display device that variably displays a second special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means;
special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
A first decorative pattern corresponding to the first special design and showing the result of the suitability determination by the first suitability determining means in a dramatic manner, and a result of suitability determination by the second suitability determining means corresponding to the second special design. a production display device that displays production contents including a second decorative pattern that shows production,
production determination means for determining production content;
In addition to controlling the execution of performance, a decorative pattern corresponding to either one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed on the performance display device as a relatively large main decorative pattern in accordance with the game state. effect control means for variably displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the other pattern as a relatively small non-main decorative pattern on the effect display device;
In front of the effect display device, it is possible to perform an effect operation involving movement in a predetermined area starting from an initial state at a predetermined initial position, and in the operation accompanying the variable display effect of the main decorative pattern, the effect display device A movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern displayed in the
operation input means for receiving an operation input by a player;
with
The production control means starts the action of the movable accessory according to the operation input by the operation input means, and the production action is performed regardless of the timing of the operation during the effective period of the operation input means. The execution timing of the return operation from the state to the initial state is constant, and when the execution period of the return operation overlaps with the stop display timing of the non-main decorative pattern, the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern is reduced. A pinball game machine characterized by executing a predetermined process in which a winning action is regulated.
[Item 2]
The pinball game machine according to item 1, wherein the effect control means executes, as the predetermined processing, switching to a effect mode in which the movable accessory is not operated.
[Item 3]
Item 1, characterized in that the effect control means executes, as the predetermined processing, a change in the timing of starting an action or a return action of the movable accessory, or a change in the content of the action of the movable accessory. Pinball game machine described.

11 first starting port 12 second starting port 51 first special symbol 52 second special symbol 60 effect display device 221 first right/wrong determination means 222 second right/wrong determination means 240 reservation control means 260 special Game control means, 265 small winning game control means, 303 effect determination means, 510 entering state setting means, 512 probability state setting means.

Claims (1)

A first starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A second starting port capable of entering a game ball,
A first right/fail determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start port;
Triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port, a second success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game;
a first symbol display device that variably displays a first special symbol for indicating the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means;
a second pattern display device in which a second special symbol for indicating the result of the right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means is variably displayed concurrently with the variable display of the first special symbol ;
special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means is a big hit;
Effect content including a decorative design that shows the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means or the result of the success/failure determination by the second success/failure determination means corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. a presentation display device to be displayed;
production determination means for determining production content;
an effect control means for controlling the execution of an effect, and causing the effect display device to variably display the main decorative pattern, which is a relatively large decorative pattern, and the non-main decorative pattern, which is a relatively small decorative pattern;
In front of the effect display device, it is possible to perform an effect operation involving movement in a predetermined area starting from an initial state at a predetermined initial position, and in the operation accompanying the variable display effect of the main decorative pattern, the effect display device A movable accessory that operates on a predetermined trajectory that can reduce the visibility of the non-main decorative pattern displayed in the
with
The plurality of types of effects that can be executed by the effect control means can be added with a predetermined visual effect associated with the movement of the movable accessory, which is a presentation that moves the movable accessory along with the display of the effect image. Movable role production is included,
The non-subject decorative designs are a first non-subject decorative design corresponding to the result of the validity determination by the first validity determination means, and a second non-subject decorative design corresponding to the result of the validity determination by the second validity determination means. , including
The effect control means controls the movable role according to the timing at which the variation of at least one of the first non-subject decorative symbol and the second non-subject decorative symbol switches to a stop display mode and the execution timing of the movable accessory effect. When the visibility of the stationary display mode of at least one of the first non-subject decorative pattern and the second non-subject decorative pattern decreases when the object is moved, visual recognition is performed instead of the action of the movable accessory. a substitute image, which is an image having an appearance that can actually be a substitute element of the movable accessory, can be displayed at the operating position of the movable accessory;
The effect control means can execute at least one of adding the visual effect and displaying the substitute image, and when the visual effect or the substitute image overlaps the display area of the non-main decorative pattern, the displaying the non-main decorative pattern with a higher display priority than the visual effect or the alternative image;
The movable accessory effect can be executed in each of a plurality of consecutive variable display effects of the main decorative pattern, and the visual effect is the last variable display effect in the plurality of variable display effects. The degree of expectation that the main decorative pattern at the timing indicates that the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit is expressed in a plurality of times of the movable character production performed in the plurality of times of the variable display production. A pinball game machine characterized in that it can be notified by making it different .

Images